Ju Ptl6liaW

A DY TO TBB EXEROISES IN ~O". dz..sUORTD COUJUD WITH THE GJml(Ali LANGUAGE. Price 50 cents.

IVISON & PHINNEY, 321 Broadway, N. Y.

•

THENr:WYORK .PUBL. ::'-';RARY

ASTOA, L ex AND TILDEN FOU'.D~TIO"S, 1897.

EllTa.aD, aecording 10 Act of CODg....... in Ii ... year J 8,~2, "v

w. 1J.';j:lZIiil.lifIiV"'D~{.

'. IIIe Clerk'. Office of the Dlstrfet Court of the United Stale>, for Ibe il'ouIIIIn

m.tri~t of N&W-VORK

_._----- --------

--_._----

NBW YORK:

J, D. BEDFORD .. 00., PRINTERS, 1111.um 11T J'umwK ITJIlDT.

..

PREFAOE.

t

I

Tms "SHOBTBB CoU.BD" with German is designecl as a.. response to the oft.repeated call for something less elaborate than the author's larger work. Its aim, therei>re, is simply and rigidly practical.

The plan differs· not bterially from that which characterizes the author's Engli,8h Course for Germans, published in 1848: the· exercises throughout being alternately English and German.

'!_he details of the method, therefore, need not here be pointed out;· as a glance at the following pages will convey • ...better impression of th~ leading fea. tures of the course, than any amount of statement

a.nd specification. '

With this brief' prefato1'J'" n~, with s~ncere thanks for the' fa vo~ shown to his previous productions, and with the ~ope iliat the present one will not be less a~ing ·of regard, the author ~mmits the work confidingly to the public.

NEW-YOu, June, 8, 18~J.

, ~.~ GERMAN SERlE

/<~ < 'S:)NEW METHOD

or

I. EARNING TO.RBAD, SPEAK AND W.RITB GBR Pri ce, $1. 25 ..

'~IpF5ics

SHO RTER COURSE WIT'H GERMA]

Price, 80. 75 .

... in ••

ELEMENTARY GERMAN READ]

P r s e e, 80. 75.

lifts t " .i' " .I!lOLEOTIO GERMAN READE]

Price, 81.

eliT '8

GERMAN.ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-GERMAN REA Pri c e, '0. ~5.

Ali 54:' neue IDlet~obe

la, 4Ilhlrruung Iter eugllfdHlI .,,,.,,,.

-'ull '1.

'cuqurllt's Irtnc~ Strits,

l"ASQUELLE'S FR;ENOH OOUIU

. Price, $1. 25. !

§uqu,ll,'" eolhqulal §ttn,tb ~btt, Pri ~c, $0. 75. v

FASQUELLE'S TEI.F.lIfAQUF..

'Price, $0. 75.

v

INDEX TO THE LESSONS.

'- L GenDan Alphabet.

t.n..n. SonD ortbe IetIen. I. VowelL i. UmlWta. 3. Dlpbthoap. 4. CoMooanta. 5. UampouDd c:a. 1OIIBIIta.

La •. m. j)ummt band.

Lu8. IV. 1. ~te article. !iI. GeD4er DC DOnDL 3. Preo. line. 0( ~~ell.

Las. V.I. Interroptlve COIIIuptioD. 2. Pre8. 1iDg. of IO~II.

La8. VL 1. Ouee. i. PoIltloo 0( I18nltI_ 3. DatIve, how rendered. 4. DecI. of. dec. art. 5. Afreement DC art. with noWlo 6. 7. 8. FOI1IIII DC decL 0( DOUDL 9. PandipI.

Las. vn. 1. Dative with prepcllltloa& i. Oonj. 0( vcbe. .

Lu •. vm. 1. Demo_live peoDOlJIII, i ... 3. DecL 0( blefn, telln, a.e.

Ln •. IX. 1. Inde!. art. II. l'oII. pron. 3. Ded. 0( Indet. art. and polL pron.

LIIinI. x. 1. Interrng. proDe. i. DeeL of mln and mlGt flit rill. 3. IDCI' flit separated. 4. !IBe1~ and IIlGt flit In exelamlltloDL II. IDCI' Cor iBo.UIII. 6. 3nnClnb, !1llemCln~, fitllld, !1l1~tt. 7. !lBCI'Cor GftlllCl'. 8. Decl. of 3emClnb. 9. ~CIf, or @lCllllllnb 81f.

..... XI. AllIe. oC old Decl. Forma oC tbe lllijective, 1. UlOId predlealively. !iI. Three Carma oC decleDlion. 3. When Inflected aeeordl", to the old elecJellllion. 4. Rejection of e before I, n or t'_ 5. EndiDp oC old deel. In the nomlnatlv.. 6. AAija. quallfyl", 1ItlIlCI., a.e.

..... XIL 1. AlIIectlV8I Infteeted accord· "Ing to the Dew decJelllloD. 2. EDdInp of new deeJenlion In the nomlIUllive.

..... XIll. 1. AlIIective Inflected accordIng to tbe mixed declension. 2. Form 0( word. requiring an adjective to be In the mixed decl. 3. Endingo of tbe mized decl. in the nominative.

..... XlV. SpeaJrJng aDd writing German ...

. 1.. ••• XV. 1. Prepe. with l1li cIIIIIft. 2. Prepe. wllb tbtaccu.llft. 3. Prepe. with the dal. or ace. 4. Prepe. ... dec. art. contracted.

1.. ••. XVI. I.N~tlve eol1Jtapdon. i. Politlon oC !Jli~l. 3.C50nbnll aD.l "bn. 4. !1l1~t 1Il.~t Y 5. NouDi or the new deeL

x... XVll. 1. ArtIcle. and pI'ODOUDi In the feminine ..,neler. 2. Declenlion of feminine nouDl. 3. Appe'''tloDl of femalel. 4. AlIIectivea In \I.e old deeleulon. II. AclJecUvea In the ne .. declelllion.

Lu •. XVm 1. ~OD ofdlmlnUti ... 2. U. of dlmlnUtivee. 3. Formalioo or eompoundl. 4. Gender of compouncle.

u.... XIX. 1. Gender of noun& i. Appellation. or penoDl. 3. Kueulln .. 4. Feminine. 5. Neuter. 6. Having two paden. 7. GeMrJc JIIUIIIlI or animllL

Lan. xx. 1. Plural 0( artleJe, poIIIMIive

and demollllrallve pI'OIIOUIII, Ioc.

II. Adjeetlvea In tile plural. 3. Old decleDilon. 4. PrMent :>Iural ot .oClM and 1EriK. Ii. !fOUDI of tbe old deelenlioD ending In e, fI, fR, tf, 41en and 'eill. 6. NOUDI Dot end"·ID e, el, a.e. 7. NOUDI having

more \ball one form Cor the plural .

I.eto •• XXI. 1. AlIIectivea of new deelentlon. II. NonDi of new declenlion. 8. Feminine nOUDL 4. NonDl of old and new declension. 5. NouDa following the old elect In the lingular and the new in the plural 6. Decl.DIlon of proper namee. 7. Feml· nine proper JIIUIIIlI ending In e •

8. Kueullne nouDS adding en._

9. U. of the anlcle. J O. Connecte4 view of aU decleDlioDe.

·LIIa •• XXII. 1. OomperillOll of adjectiveL 1I. Umlaut 3. Irregular. 4. Uninflected fonn. 5. Superlative with Clm. 6. How declined. 7. Supe ... latlve combined witlr !!IlIn. 8. Com-

pered by meaDi of I1nf~r. 9.3ebt\\o. 10. \?oa\\\(.\\ a\ ""\.U'A. ... ~

6

INDEX TO THE LESSONI.

I ..... XXIII. J. Aliject. used substantively. Instead of B personal pronou ..

2.3. 4. Terminations dropped. 5. Old 4. @;oldiet instead of a demonstra

and new deel .. 6. Uled adverbially. tive or personal pronoun. 5. ~ben.

Su~rlatjve with Illuf' and Bum. 6. 7. @;t!bfl:. '

8. Wife! and ~autet. 9. Formed from Lz.s. XXX. 1. ~er a. demonstmtive. nouns. 10. Bentenees used adjec- 2. Use of b,,' and bieV. 3'. IDlan. tively. 11. Following a noun. 12. De-

rived from names of ·countries. Lns. XXXI. 1 • .R6nnrJI. 2. ~iitffll.

13. From names of persons. 3. \Ulagen. 4. @;oUen. 5. !IDol.

1.1: ••• XXIV. ,1. Gen. of pera. prone, 2. Pers. len. 6. \Uliijfen. 7. l!"jftn.

pron. used reftu. 3. ReO. pron. @;Idi. 8. Conj. of. 9. Fo.m of perf. and

4. eidi translated by a pers, pron. pluperf. 10. Collocation. 11. Omi ...

S. Pe~s. and reft, pron •. ueed as reel- sion of tbe main verb. 12. Fona

proeal. 6. 7. Vae of the peon, of the of second and third persons.

second pers. sing. 8. 9. Use of the 1.I:.s.:xxxn. 1. @ifin. 2. Conj, 3. IIBet-

second pers. plur. 10. Third pers. ben. 4. Conj.

ling. for the second. 11. Tbird pers.

plur, for the second pers., slng. or 1.I:sI. XXXIll. 1. Irregular verbs. 2. Fonn

plur. 12. Prons. referring to neuter of infinitive. 3. 4. 5. Furmation ot

appellation. of pers. 13. Gender of Imperfett tense, and perfect partl-

prons. referring to Inanimate objects. eiple. 6. Irregular in the present

14. Adv_ substltued for a pron. and tense. 7. Formation of the second

preposition. IS. Uee of 11ft, as gram- and third persons, 8. List of Irre-

matlcal lubJ. 16. Posltion of tbe gular verbs.

grammatiealsubJ. 17. Various uae. w ••. XXXIV. .ooben as auxiliary.

ot 11.- 2. eein as auxiliary. 3. .pabfR

Lull. XXV. 1. Abaolute poue.lve pron. or @;ein.

2. Uled lubetantively. 3. Tnftectlon w ••. XXXV. i. Inftnitive without !U.

of .ltdn and lIilt. 4. \Uleine.. 2. 3. Rendered by our present par-

gIddien, &e. tiel pIe. 4. As subject of a verb.

r..... XXVI. 1. Prea. rendered by the perf. 5. After particles. 6. Used pas-

2. By the fuL 3. Use of the Impert. slvely. 7. Um witb infinitive.

4. Posltloo of InftniL and partie. In 8. After llBijfen.

compound teDlOl. S. Perf. in refer-

ring to put time. 6. Uee of the fut.· LI: ••. XXXVL Present participle. 2. Used

7. "Verb repll!ltad, or aaxil. omitted. prediealively. 3. Perfect participle

",... after .ltommen. 4. With @e~en.

8. Colli· of ... ...,en. 9. Idioms with Ii. Uled imperatively. 6. Future

.oobelt. participle. 7. Imperative. 8. In-

t.n. XXVII. 1. Form of InftnlL 2. RooL dieative.and~I!Uen, used as, 9.~a.

3. Pres. partlelp. 4. Pert. particlp. bUtdi to,.

5. Formation of prea. Indle. 6. For-

mation of Impart. 7. Formation of w ••. XXXVIL i.Oompound verb •• 2.3.

pert. and plupert 8. Formation at 4. Position of the particle. 5. Pre-

!be futures. 9. Colli. of ~Iebm. lIxed to a verb not accented on tbe

.... XXVIII. 1. BeIaL pron. 2. Forma IInot syllable. 6. Signifieation of.

oflhe .... Itlve. 3.4. PoIition of the w •. XXXVIIL Adverbs. 1. With verba

verb In relaL I8Dtence. S. RelaL and of rest, 2. With verbl of motion.

prineip. eentanee. 6. Conjunctions. 3 . .pin and .oer separated from !:Do

7. ~er, J)ie, :I),,' as relative. 8. eO and lIDo. 4 . .pin and {ier, defined,

.. a lOlae 9. Uee ofllDer. 10, Uee 5. How translated. 6. ~R, .pirr,

of lIDo.. II. lIDddier in tbe ligoi- &te. compounded with preps. '7. For-

liealion of "some". 12. Adv. IUb- mauon of adverb ..

atItuted (or a pron. and preposition. x.. .. XXXIX. 1. "CoUoeation of subor .

.. 13. Omiloion of the copula. 14. Uee dinate sentence. 2. Correl.tive

olthe relat. with pera. prona. 15. In- 3 Ob I ..... , "'&

version of relaL and antecedenL warda.. 9 tl"" &te. ..... er, &te. 5. Invers.on of subjeet and

t... XXIX. 1. DetermInative pronoues, verb. 6. Conjunction omitted in

2. :l)eUor btrielliQf. 3. ~tfelbe translation. 7. PooltioD of adoerbl

I

7

willi -vecu- 8.".. __ .. Adftrbe oltiJM and_. z-. XL. 00uIpQMI ftrt..· 1. U_ eented pertic:IeL 2. 3. U .. ccented, or accented. L AucmenL

r.. XLI. 1. Bulllonctift .. poIeJItIaL

2. Rendered by tbe lDdleadft.

3. AI Impemlve. L Q,qJ. of .. bo Jnuetive. Ii. ""'-&Ion or .. bjanoo tift: of resuJar vert.. .. or ImpJar verba.

I.L XLII. 1. QmdIdonaJ. 2. IJnpIrM and pluperfect. 3. CondItIoD DOl eIp...-L L Condllloaal -" Interrotllltively. Ii. 000J. ot oOUta and ~cin.

las. XLDI. 1. Bellulve verbL 2. a.denod by IDCIa .... tift 0: pullve varb&

x... XLIV. 1. lmpel'llOnaI verb& 2. o.m. aIon ot II.. 3. ."en. 4. St,. _Im. I<c. Ii. ImpeNOaaI and relleIl ....

x- XLV. Puoift. 1. rom.tion of. 2. 9Dorku. 3. UI8d ImpeNOaaIIy. 4. J'aradi&m.

t .... XLVL 1. !let: art. omilled In_ Ialing. 2. BuppUed In tralllla~ 3. L lode'. art. omitted. Ii. kale{. "ea, "Co

1.1. XLYU. 1. Proper and eommon DOODI. 2. Date: 3. NoUDI of -IIbt, I<c. L 91ft. e, flfa 'ur. .. mlG1UL

Wn. XLVIU. 1. Prepos. with tbe ~ 2. 3. Wltb len. or dat. 4. 06, .. , Ioc. Ii. Um-lIIIUm. 8. ~,lbm, b, compounded. 7.9IItit,tt. 8. AdJecUV8I aovemJnI tho genitive. t. Adject. aoveml.., the IlCeUl. 10. Alijeet. followad by prepos.

I... XLIX. 1. Verb IOV8rnJnr the pa. 2. UI8d puliftly. 3. Raftez. with the geo. L With ImpeNODal ft ..... Ii. Wltb Clanalt. ftrba 8. Vert. fbUowed by prepotL 7. Genltlft omlUed In Clalllillllon. 8. GeniI1ve -' Idverblally.

..... L. 1. Vert. lovernlqthe dat. and _ 2. Gcmm.IDt 1M daIIft.

a. DIIIIft with In." 110. 4. .... 11ft ftrt. wttb dalI... Ii. Vart. IOftI'IIIIII daL or _ .. Dulve

wlth..ueet. 7. Dallve iDIteId 01 the genitive or a JIOIII. plOD. 8. Be _ n6re_ 8. PoIItIon ot daL

and -. 10. DIIlIve with .... h!,1oc.

!.Ma. LI. 1. DecIenL otl" and mi. 2. or "Ier to • .,&1. 3. Cardinal nutoben -" IUbocIInUftly. '- ~aR. ~rrt, Ioc. Ii. Fraelloaal nWDben. .. ~'I". 7. ~I" In ~poundL 8. I!nIIIza er and (iaa.

I-. Uf. 1. _Uer. 2. _nm. 3.9Ioell. 4. IIID11nbtr. 5. l8eibe. 8. lIinl. aer. 7.lItlIIlI'. 8. 3rAm~. 8. 3eo Mr. 10 . .Ieiller, e, e •. fl . .Ieil!, DOt a,1oc. 12. IIlanl. 13. 14. 15. IBid and tBmlg. f8 .• Itt with art. or

JIOIII. proD. .

LuLLID. ...

x- L1V. 1. Waf. 2. _ ••.

x- LV. 1. ~ 2. !Dar... 3. Wit. x- LVI. 1 .• arD. 2. -raenner.

3. lataeam. 4. Sa.

L-. LVII. 1.!DlU, 2.!Jl4", 3. 91, ..

~uft. .

x- LVIII. 1. 011. 2. 0."" 3. Seil x- LIX. Ueber.

X-LX. Uat.

x- LXL t. Uater. 2.... 3.lBor. x- LXJL t. Sa. 2. With IIUD8II of

permDL 3. Sn ~'nfc.

x- LXID. t. 91T1er. 2. 911.. 3. .1. omitted. 4. 'lIfo. Ii. 91n".

x- LXIV. 1. e,'_. 2. l8i.. 3. :01' 4. !t)".

L-. LXV. 1. !t)4IIn. 2.!!)m1l. 3. !t)o~. 4. II~ 5. lI~e. 8. (Irjt. 7. lIiIII .. 8. ~f. 8.3mmtl:. 10.3,. H.3e.

x- LXVI. 1. !JUcf1t. 2. 910". 3. !nail. 4. «54on. 5. eo.

x- LXVU. 1. eonlt. 2. IBleDd"t. 3. L llBtc. 5. tDo.L

~LXVDL TIIIII or ......

GENERAL INDEX.

UIIOIla. --.

Uer fonbem, dlllqulabed . 16. 3. !3)o~. • • 86

Acculllltlve, 6. 1. Wltb prepCllddODl 15. Dati",. " • • • • 110.

Ao~. or clat. with preps. til. With verba Declelllioa, ,,('1", article, noun, de-

110. II. Ace. or gea. with adj. 48. 8. 9. molllL and poaa. pronouDB • 21. 10.

With verba • • • • 49. DelDOll8ll'ativeproaOIlllll, • 8. 30.

A<ijectl"ea. predieattve and attributive 11. !3) '28 '1 29 2 30

Old Decl. 11. New Dec!. 12. Mixed fr.. . ~ .. .. .

Decl 13 Co IpariBo of. 22 Ueed J)erjfniBf... . 29.

• . m .. U .. n •. IUb- De"'.minatlve pronoUDI • • 29.

Imntively.23. . Ueed adverbially. 23.6. Diminutive .. 18. Geudar. 18. 2. 24. 12.

Witb the gea. 48. 8. The dat. SIl. 6. Di btbo 2 UL

The ace. . . • . 48. 9. !3) p i np, . • • • .

Advert>a, FormatIOn of, 38. 6. '1. 23. 6. '1. ....~f I DeClension of • Ill. 1.

PoaI .... n 39 '1 N DIed 49 8 ...,ur,en... • 31. 2.

'own i~"'" .• 0IlIIlI, ... •• Clben,. • . 65 .

.... e 11,. • • • • • 63. ...... '!Ie

aUer, pre1IDd 10 euperlatlvea, 22. '1. Ap- "'Y" • • . ......

plied 10 Dumber and quantity • 112. it. termlDaUoD, 21. ~ b.

911. • • • • • • 63. I1Bm, • • . 112. 12.

91m, 111. ~ With tho IUperlative 22. G. lIi~llnbtr. • 8." ~: t

IIln, • • • • . tli. 3. 53. lliniee, etl!~, • • • . 52

!lnber. 112. 2. 3. lin, audlx In tonDIDg I4ectIvw . 23. 9.

!lIn~rl~"l:' • • . • 3l. '1. QnlgeBm, . • . • . 56. 3.

!IIn,.IlII, . '1. WiUllnllDlttve • 35. 5. CIrfl. . 65.

Article, fonDI of, ~ 9. Dec!. 8. 4. 9. 3. 2' '5

Contracted with prept. 15. ~ Bulee for • • 110',

the U88 and plllition of 46. atlD.. • . 65.

....... 63 IitIDll',. . • • • . 52 .

.... 'Y,. • ...• . ,emiDiDe. adjective, artiCle, noun, de-

!lnf. 111.3. U With Mlperladveo, 23.7. JDODIIItatIve and poIIeEve pronoUDII'1.

!luf'. with BUperlatlve, • • 23.7. lao. ""'. I L..

AUlliliary verba, of "'DBa, 'r1. 'I. 8. 84. 0' •• ' 0 ... 11 em, • . 68.

Omitted, 28. 13. Of mode, 31. InIIaIUva ~ture teD8e" U88 o( . • 26. O.

ID8Iead of parllclpIt, 31.8. IIfaln verb ... lIua. not declined. . lit. O.

omitted • • • • 31. 11. GeD4er, • '. • • • 4. 21.

elllb, •• • 64. 1. GeDltlve, pClIdtion of; 8. 2. With prepoai-

!BrI. •• • 15.115. IIoDB 48. 1. AcUectlV88 48. 8. With

etlbe, IB", . 52. IS. verba, 48. Ueed adverblallJ. 49. B.

1B1t.. . • . • . 84. 2. Ilbea. CoD,luptioa, 26 . .All IIUlIIIIary 34.

0Ipi1ala, RuJea tor. ~ Note, U. 8. 23. t. Ib,. . '.' . III. 6.

Cardinal DUIIlbeD • •• 61. albea.l4l&n, 48. 4. In eompoaml., 48.6.

Oleel •• 8. 48. 49. 50. dem, • • . • . 35.

Collocation of wonll. • • 39. t. 1IIIlIIL. . 21

ComparlBOD of adja. • • • 22. er and .of., . . 88. 2. 3.

Comparative, DecL of, 22. 8. Jmc. forml en, •• . 68.

0( . • • . • 22. 3. fn. In compoll1llll . 38. 2.

Compound., formaIioa o~ Adftrbo, 38. Con- in, _ . 38. 2. 3.

IOnanll, 2. V. NoUDl, 18. 2. Verba lepar- lIabert, • 5t. 3. 4.

able. 3'1. I1IIIIparabie. • • 40. er, 65.

Conditional mode. • • • 42. Imperative, 86. 7.

CoD,lugatiOD of verba, regular 2'1. Irregt!- ImpenlOnai verba.. • • • 44.

Jar • • • 33 and P. 178. 38. as prep. 58 . .As terminatloD, • 18.

CoD,lunctioDB. 39. Indieatift used as imperative 36. 8.

!3)o. 64. In CompoUDCII 38. Infinitive, • 35.

:DIII·.a. filS. Interrogative conjugation . . 5.

!3)lIj. 64. Interrogative ordinal number ISl. 13,

![)enn, 65. Interrogative pronoUD' • 10.

8

,

,_ -

3rg,.... • . ~2. 8. NIIft, 21. ~ fO. -..c.Iproo

JmpIar __ II. P. 178. C8I, 14. 5. ........ • U. 2. 4.

31. •• •. • M. Proper __ • • • • • 11.

b.. " 65. Quanti". wetabt. -. N_ 4uodJrt. D

,. • 8. 3. III. II. BecJprocaJ pro__. . . K~.

!lltn, • . ~2. 9. lIefteslve, JIIOIIOUIIIt 14.1. 4. V..... 43.

'rill.. U. to. -. lteJatJn ~ • • 28.

Irit. 1U1IIz. •• • 21. Edlon. . '. . ...

.Relhlen,. •• • 8f. 1. eela. u..-. I. II. V.. • 82.

&!fea. • •• • 81. 7. ~dt • • • . . . liB.

fefil. cIlmlDUd_ h,. . t8~ ~l'n, ftDIt • • • • 21. 8.

Uot atlrr. ftlW • 178. 8eDtaace, ~ ~ ,rIMIpaI, 21."

BRan, •• • 80. 8. IilubonlJData • • ~ ..

1Jlan4u,.. • 8. 8. eo . • . . . . &8

IJlit. . • • • • • 87. eone ... 81. ~ I u llllperadft • 18.8.

IIixad decIeMioD 0( A4 . . 13.·1lome. . • • • 82. 8. Noce.

BROstn,. • • • • 31, a. IilulduDetlve mood. • • • 41.

Hoods. CoDclitionaJ, 42. 1D1IDJU .... l1li. Jm- ltaufeQ • • • • • K"

perative, 38. 7. lJubjuoedY8 • 41. TeD-. bow lormed,' 27. ~. -. B_

BRiitfrn, •• It. 8. 11.-1. • • •• 28.

Ra... . .. 87. Ucm. . . .. 59.

~.lIft 0lD,Iapdaa f8. llat, 80. Ua -lIriUca • • ""~.

fHifJt, ., • ... UlIIIllllt : . • • . 2. IL

Rolt,. . . • • • 88. Uutn. . " • 8t.

NoUD" Geuder or, If. DecIeaIIoa, (Old) Verbl, 1Ul.IIUary, at mode, 81. or teDR,

8 8. (New) 18.~. or meuure, quan- 32. 3. 34. Compouod, lepuable, 37.

tity. &co. • n. lnI8puabie, 40. Im"'_"", Jrre.

KomeraJa, 111. M. 1'JIar. 83. ..... ve, 41. Jeaeme, ....

0& • • •• • liB. llegoIar • • • • 27. 41. ~.

Oblte, 58; with ID1IniIive • l1li. b. IBid. • M. 13.

Ordinal numben • • • • 111. lBiellei4t . 87.

Paradlpl at.pdat. 21; eda .. dike- fl ••. '. . 81.

bra, 32. 41. 42. ......... • 4IS. lB.r • 81.

ParUclple.,ibrmado. 0( 27. 8. 4. Declen- Vowell. • • 2. L

lion and eolllparioon 0( 27. ON. milt.. • fo. 28. to.

Pall part. for 1m......,., II. I. J'utllre ilBt. fir • • • 10.

puticlple • • • • 88. 8. IDdltn • • 10. 28.

Paooiwe .erllll • 41. iBn . • fO. 28. II.

Perfect _. • 2I.~. IIkrMa • •• • 32. a.

.... nonaI ~. • • • 24. iDle • • •• • 87.

Plural. DOUlIII Javllll two .,.._ • 20. lIBilftll, willa laIIaIIIW. • l1li. 8.

~ft pJODOo-, (C01IjImcdft) 9. 2. mo. In ~ • 88. 8.

(abeolute). • • • • 15. moll' • • 87.

Prellsell. of ftrbI, Mpuable, 37. m- m.Un. . at.

potable, 40. 8eparab1e and u.pa- moDtll • •• 41. 2-

rable • • • • • 40. 2. 'Iu . . .. . 8l

l'repooItiou • • • • t~. 48. .~"e .'.. 48. 3.

p~ ~a , ... 8.80. DeWnDt- uid,........... 1It.s.

••• hm "!llu,,.Jjorler 1)emo!roltn".

Wot4ueUe", Reue frolllofffcl)e (grammatl •. - 1)lefe !.!Summotlf III nalt 1D00bbur~" bufiOmtem eramatlfallfellen \plane entlllorfen, IIIdellet burell fdne !lJorliigllell. rdt lum itlernen dnu S~raelle burell feOm ober burdl Sdbtlunlerrlelll elne foldle Wn ,.rennune eefunbm Oal, IIIle noell rein inllllurf blefet tIIrl. 1),ulfelle, IIIdelle ble fran!ij~felle eproelle ulunen 1II01Ien, unb nur tinleermalen mit bet engllfellen Spracfle "utraul ~nb, lIIubm burcfl ble l8eRli~une Hefe. l8ucl)e' dnen boppelten lIJottOdl eelllinnen, Inbem ~e 11140renb bu lirletnune ber frAnI6~fcl)en Spracfle ~eIIlueldcl)· III bet engllfcflen IIolIenb •

• u.bllben.

1D0obbut~" "Ion III belOo1'6 [0 un8emdn~fillllcl), IIIdl et ~eII me~r 11111 bem ~rartlfcl)en s:telle bet Sprocfle. at. mit bem trocrenen unb umfibenben St:OeoreUfcflen befellliftlgi unb Idbe fIll,fenOdtm bu Spraelle auf tine folcl)e aneeneOme unb fa'llelle fIlldf. "erfellmlllt, hI bu funenbe jebe odernte fectlon foerdell anlllenben lann, unb foOln ble St:Oeorie unler bem Qlelllanbe bet "tO~' jlell andenet.

1)le dnltlnen fectionen tlnb auf dne forelle aU'ee,del)nd prartlfelle Wrl abeetOdlt, bot bu Selliiler nael) bem 1)urcl)eeOen dnlen bufef6m fogldcl) hi ben Stanb eefe~t IIIltb. fdbll. JAnblge e4~e lubUben. unb blefdben In "onllttfotion onlulllenbm.

FROM Tal: II NIIW-lU.VEN PALLADIUM."

Jiluguell.'. JI("" lihmd& Cour ... - This work JI regarded by studenta in French Be po_ing qualities not found In any other, and there are none which 10 effectually and _turally blend tbe analytic and synthetic .yottJDI 88 this one now before us, whicb ill eub.ltantially Woodbury's New Method.

FRO)( TB. "ZIolI'. HEII.un ""0 WULBY"" Jouall.u."

Thll JIl'Ilmmar I. before all othera that we have yet seen, for ita thorough practical and 1dI0matie course of instruction. In filct, It seems to us scarcely capable of an improvement. We are glad to learn that it Is rapidly making ita way into our Icboola and academies.

Faox TB. uNJ:w-YoaK EvANGJ:LIBT."

!l!BoollltI",," aeae .etI,ollt iUr Clrlernu.g lIer eagllfcl)ea e"racl)e.The title of the work' giw .. tbe reeder an aecurate idea of ita object-it ra a grammar and chreltomathy for tbe acquisition of th!, Englisb language by GermanI. Ita great merit, and it il very great, Iiel in ita edmirable perapicuity. The precise difficultie. wblch a German would experience in learning our language bave been detected by cIoIe observation and long practice; and these are met and removed with a .kill and In an order that may lay claim to true philoaophy. The idioms of the two Iangllage. -the different force of lettera In pronunciation, the difference of grammatical conItructlon, and of the general uoage 'of worda, are clearly defined, and iIIustraRd by luch ftI'Ied and peraplcuoUl examples, that the Btudent cannot fail of the rigbt impresoion. It Is a work of evident and long attention to tbe .ubject; and we are not surprised that It baa acquired lufficient popularity In Germany to be republisbed there. For tb. purpose of learning the German it Is aloo bigbly useful, and mlgbt profitably take th. place of many a Iargar grammar.

FRo)( R.v.R. ALL'fIIt I'anIOIPJ.L or EAIT Ga..,lIWlcB ACJ.DI:IIY, R. I.

The pblloeOphy upon which the "M.non" II founded is the method of nature, and .heretore belt adapted to a rapid acqUisition, a thorough knowledge, and a ready uoe .r any language. A. the German i. full of the treasures of literature. its worth to a echol .. II Immense. To all wbo wish to learn it lDell, and at the snme time rapidly and· pleasnnUy, thll book Is worth more than their money.

FRo. Tal: U C.A.TTAlU.UGt18 CBaONlCLI:."

There II <mIry thing In having the tillht kind of a hook. It I. 25 y • .ara since we had our Initiation into the German Language, and what obstacles did we not find in our way for want of such a book a. the one now before UI I We now ... y to teachers and otudeutB get Woodbury's NI!1IJ Jlr.thod with GerIM', if YOII would have a pleasant, plain. practical and tborougb introduction to reeding .peaking and compoelng this iJ>.

I8leItinll languag.. •

~~ SHORTER OOURSE.

LESSON I. ltell .. I.
GBRIlAN ALPBABBT.
G81TItIM ~nglu". Pr01&U~
'Ill a ah
186 b bay
~ e c tsay
~'o d day
Ii e 8 e (as in prey)
~ f r eff
:: ( -Ch
3* I i i (as in pique)
3* i 1 k:
.It!
~ I I ell
IWm m emm
~n n ann
00 . 0 oh
lD\' p r~
.0" q
8t1' r err (as in error)
@) f e (21. e.) • ess
X t t tay
Uu • o (as in do)
!Db T Cow (as in Cowl)
QDIU W' yay
!~ x ix
tv, y ipsilon
.8 a z tset.
• 3. belbnIa ~III, _0 to I; as In 3mmff. 36rI ; ~fore a wwel, to Y
M.ID 34~f. 11 12

SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS.

UMLAUTS.

~e or a, Oe or 6, Ue or U.

DIPHTHONGS. ai, au, el, eu, au.

d1, ch; tsay-bah j

~OMfOUND CONSONANTS.

ef, ck j fd1, sch j ff, S8 j

teay-kah j ess-tsay-hah ; ess-ess j

j, SZj V, tz.

esa-tset j tay-teet.

ft, at, ess-tay

LESSON II.

lutiOll II.

SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS.

I. Vowels.

,-

6t'l ... 1. !!l, Cl sounds like a, in ah, car. 'l(~n, ll!tm, ll!al,* !Blatt.* Q.. ,.2. (i, e sounds like e, in tete, very. Wie~t, ~a, .peer," .pen.* ( (. 3. 3, i sounds like i, in pique, pin. 3~t, 5:lit, Wiit, l'dnf.

4.0, " sounds like 0, 00, in no, door. Wio~r, Wion'o, !Boot.* 5. U, u sounds like 0, in do. U~r, .put, !!Jut, mun, IDlurren.t,

1', 6. W, , sounds like i, in 3~t, &c., (see 3 3). Wfo~, St,);.

II. Umlauts.t

7. ll!e, It sounds nearly like e, ll!e~fel, @iirtner, !Blitter, S~at.

8. Oe, ij sounds as in Olomerll, o-r, !Uob~l, l'o'oten, Olii~re.

9. Ue, u sounds as in ijur, II Uebel, WiiiUer, @iite, ijiiUen.

III. Diphthongs .

. 10.ll!i, 'Ii (or a,) aoundsnearlylike..!!Y.inaye . .pai,ll!ai,IDlai. -.ll.ll!u, au sounds like ou inpt . .pau6, IDlauB, ~ilut, !Brauer. 12. Cli, tt (or ey) sounds like i in die. !Bein, Olein, .!tein, ~dn • . 13. ~, eu sounds nearly like oi andoy in oil, boy . .pru,(iu{e. 14. !!leu, liu sounds nearly like eu • .!taufer, llleugeln, !Baumen.

• A vnwel, wileD doubled, ilIlhereby lengthened: followed by a double consonant,

it is ohorteued. .'

t DI.yllablea, unle. otherwise noted, are accented OD, Ibe llrat.

t Umlaut aigni1lea ebaDpd or modilled aound. The Umla~!II are produced by. union of e with G, 0, U, respectively. ExCflpt when they are capital, tbe ~ ill usuall, expressed by two dots, thus; i, 6, Ii (instead of Ge, De, ue),

II For D and ii, there are In Engllah DO corresponding sounds, !Romn and fiir, for .ample, migbt, perhaps. be understood. if pronounced raymer, and fear, but tbis HI by no _,.. correct. The French ... In pn.r a08_ preuy DOAKy to 6, and .. ill .... to A.

18

IV. Crms01lfJnta.

15. fB, \), f, ~, f, I, m, n, ~, q, ~ sound like b, d,f, A, Ic, I, fit, n, p, q and x.

16. ~, e, before s, I and ,in the same syllable sounds like a (ts): otherwise, like k; ~tf, «lilli', ~~tda'l, ao~al'.

17. (I, 0, at the beginning of a syllable, sounds like g in gig: but never as in gin, &c. After 1l in the same syllable it sounds like our g hard in like position; ~at, ~n9fl, IBrln9Mt, @eUMt, OlingeI, lBang. Otherwise its sound approaches, usually, that of the Greek?C, or If1 (see 26 Ill) i ~a9, megnMt, !)lag'll, 2e1l'AI9.

18 • .p, ~, in the midst or at the end ora syllable m si~tlnt, but serves to lengthen its vowel; IDtt~r, ~o~n, ~~un, !)lut~.

19. 3 j, sounds like !I consonant; 3a~t, 3ube, 3anuar, 3ubel.

20. m, t is uttered with a trill or vibration of the tongue, and with greater stress than our r ; mo~r, mtlm, IBrob.

21. ~, f, at the beginning of a syllable followed by a vowel, has a sound between that of • and a; ~o~, ~age. Otherwise it sounds like a; @al, !Dlefee. At the end of a word I, instead of f, is employed.

22. ~, t sounds like t in test ; ~e!t, ~~t. Where in English t sounds like sh; t has the sound of ts (4) ; ~tlltlon, station, mation, nation.

23. m, Ilsoundslikefinfit; metttf. In foreign words!) sounds like Ill; meneblg, maloti.

24. QD, III has a sound between thl\~ of to and e ; fIDtlt, ®af. [er, After a consonant in the same syllable it sounds like to; ~d)lIler, Bllltl.

25. B, a sounds like ts ; Ba~I, Aa~m, Blnn, qkIa, Ba~n, Blmmtf.

V. Compound C01lS01lfJntS.

26. ~, d), in primitive. words, followed by f, sounds like Ie; ~Ild,ll, llld,lfe. Otherwise d,I has its guttural sound; ~ad1, .pod)*, ~ud,l, ~ad1fd,lrlft (compounded ofnad1 and ~d1rlft). In foreign words d) retains its original sound; ~arac'ttf, ~aife •

• To aid in prndllclnl tlli. IOUnd take. for experiment tbe above word ~o~: pro_nee ~ precioeiy IiIP nur word lin! ohtoo!rving. only. In give &I (ull and di,'inct a lIrtGtAi.., at the do .. ' • at the hecinning; thu .. W. ~O~. When not preceded by ft, !I or U." Ilight hi .. i .. , IOUnd of r or r~ lI&Iurally auacb .. to the ~; .. in .pe~t,

~ri~,3~. '

14 EXERCISES ON THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTFRS.

27. ~~, f~ sounds like sh; ~cf1nut', ~cf1ilb, ~djiller, Scf1ule, ~d}iff. ~djll'ert, Sd}utt.

28. ~ (though compounded of f and A) sounds like ff and occurs only at the end of a syllable ; nll~, S:u~.

29. ,(compounded of t and a) sounds like a, and, like ¥, is used only at the end of a syllable; !U(IlV, Stu,en.

EXERCISE 1. "ufSllbt 1.

Vowels. Umlauts. Diphthongs.

(a)'llltar, !BaU, !Banf, Sanb, 2amm, .oanb, !Inann, !lifer, !Baar, lJaU. (e) !Inter, !Inetfer, .ReUer, tirbe, (ir&e, tifd, tiben, tioet, ~ett, !Belfer. (I) !Bitte, ~lllel, ~inben, IJlnne, IJII)tte, ~immel, ~Inten, ~Im, .oid. (0) !Bo~le, !Bolu." !Bombe,. !Borb, !Born, !Bote, !Breb, ~oTIl, lJolter. (u) Ufer, Unb, !Bunb, Ilnunb, ~unb, 8tunb, .pu~n, .oulb, @ulben, !Runb. (I) ~I)men, ~lIbra, ~I)mne, ~l)IIer'bel, !pl)raml'be, <Sl)mbo'l, Xl)tann'. (ai, el) ~aln, ~ell. !lnaln, !nem, ~a'ib, 2eib, !palt, !nai, !Bel, !peln, !Bell (au) !BItU, !Baum, ~aub, <Staub, ~aut, lJaul, lJaujl, <sauer, !nauer. (du, eu) <Sdufer, ~dute, 2eute, ~dute, ~rute, ~dufer, !Beutel, !Reuen. (d, e) ti~ten, !le~tt, .peben, !Bdr, lJeber, IJdUe, lJe~ler, I»dtet, @eben. (0) .oefen, !Borne, ~omn, !BlObe, !BUren, .oel, .oe~r, Xollfet, Xroller. (i't) Uebuns, Ueben, Xiimllel, XiiUe, !nii~le, !Inunjler, mulie, mujler.

EXERCISE 2.

,ufSllbt 2.

Consonants. DoublB Consonants.

(ij) ijabett', ijdfur', ijebttn, ijlbet, ij(atfe, ijober, ijl)mba'l. 2edlon. (@) @alid, @e&en, @elll, @aul, ~ift, @Imn, @la", <Singen, XatS' (.0) ~aat, ~ebel, ~Io&, ~obd, ~uf, ~eilllnb, ~o~l, .oo~e, ~o~elt. (3) 3a. 3ammer, 3ubel, 3e, 3unfet, 3ull, 3eber, 36.ger, 3ener. (!R) !Rab, !Ra~m, !Reben, !Rei." !Rinb, !Ro~r, !RoUe, !Roft. !Ruber, !Rl)IIe. (<S) <Saat, <Sdbel, <Sanb, <Seele, <Se~r, <Seife, <Sleb, <Sinn, <Solb. <SIIann. (X) Xabel. Xaub, Xelg, XeUer. Xlnte, Xltel. Xobt. Xotf. Xtanf, Xtoll. (tH) men"", mer&um, merfe. tHoU, motber, morrau, mle~. miel. miller. (!lIl) !lIlaate, !lIlebe. !lIla~n. mleber. !lIlinb. !lIloUe, !lIlurll, !IDieber. !lIliUe.

(~) ~antllllle. Xed, !Inlrtur', @lrlom', ~t~elm • .oemei' • .oeraimetct.

(,s) 3a~len. ,sItter, ,settel. ,sauber. ,selget, ,seU. Bent. ,Settel, ,Seuge.

(ij~) Ci~ao". !lIlad)". !lIleieb, \jladj", !nild). !lIlidJfe. ij~;~, ij~ur, ij~riil. (<Seb) <Sebad)tel. Wlfdjer, Sd)abe. <Sd)au, !Bufeb. <Sd)lUa9!t, <SeblUad). (j Ii) !Inelier, !lnejner, <Seblefien. ~aj, !nelie. 2alien, lPaj, <Salien. (V I) XroV, Wive, !nira, !BUV. !laurr., <Sd)anaer, <Sd)av, ~d)na- Se~e ••

!lIled)fel bet 3a~u"aelten. !IDle febon ill bet !lIleebfel bet Sdtm, !lIlie feblUinbet mit 1~lIen ba" 3a~r ! !lIlle ~mllebe lJreubm bereiten

Unb biden ben !Inenfd)en ~e bat!

?/.,~/' ,/;'t("./' s., /~ d·:t~ .> i

<L 6 ~ <l (0" .r /ft ;/" , /./

. /<'11), <:ft.--' <r« "// ,/jj ,,'

~_;fJ ,.,.:. , '/.7/ fr r ' " (0;, ,/I, ' // ./

A- I ", /Y.·o P. 1- r- .I' I:

.I." J/ IJ;) 'Y'ft' /" 1/

;r~ I /{;/ • .A, //

u ZJ ID ... .Y" ::::: orl

ct, /.' .. # ( " j1f"> '/ /,',,' I" /J /' H' II

"". " (' Ii ,. /.1' _/." ./,T, t'" ,/./ Ir / nil '~

'J j , ,

. ~~ .. ' . y ... , .'J / ,.,. "C-' I.'" /' ). "_.J

./p /"7 r . of' , ,. U tI tv '''", »: / 't

. H *'" '.,,: ) .. r :

, '! ' c: ';' I ~/I,/. j t /"./ /~

a. a u ~ . .f /.nvf. "-,,.3 /"t "It: .n

-_ "".

C'

tY:.r~ I("/;Y j(!, l'/ It '/",; .:J.

(til" //;".,(J / .I}/r",(.

1<;" I'y'"~ / /

//7/;'/

, t, C'

7':,f II' ;/

/~;/;/

y"r ''/ ' ¢,n, ~. '

c:

I, (

////;t '"

//.. .. /

¥' "

,A 1'"""" It' I

,0/;/'t " /,. //:I;'~/H , (/:" r; /~t

:; ..

DD. ARTICLE. GENDER OF NOUNS. oOca6m, pap. sma 11

v

LESSON IV.

"teUn IV.

DEFINITE ARTICLE IN THE NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.

1. The definite article in the nominative singular, hu • distinct form for each gender; b e r masculine, bit feminine and b ClG neuter.

GENDER OF NOUNS.

2. Some nouns denoting inanimate objects are called mas-' culine or feminine," and some denoting animate objects are called neuter; as

MASCULINE, bn trolntn, t the winter; bn ~ta~{, the steel;

FEMININE, bie !BrigS, the brig; bit mofe, the rose;

NEUTER, baG .!tinb, the child; baG iSlf)af, the sheep.

8. PRESENT SINGUL~ OF ~ a 'Ii e n.

Affirmatively. Interrogatively.

(If) ~ru,e, I have ; ~a1ie llf)" have I ?

~it ~a1ien, you have; ~a1ien ~ie'?t have you?

er ~Ilt, he has; l}at n" has he?

~in,-L beer. ~tautT, m. brewer. ~rob, n. bread.-Gllad. n. glass. Glfafer, m. glazier. @clb, n. gold. - 3a. yes. - 2toer, n. leather. - !lne~l. n. flour, - lnein, no. - ()~et'. or. SattltT, m. saddler. Sd)mleb, m. smith. - Unb, and. -!IDad. what. !IDeln. m. wine. !IDet'. who. See Vocabularies, pp. 190,280.

EXERCISE 4. '_.fgllbt 4.

1. !IDn ~at bad @olb Y ~,!net' !!It'aun ~at bad Glo(b, 3. -t5at bet' et'aun bad IilalS! 4. 91eln, bet' (ilafet ~at balS @lad. unb btT !Braun 4at balS !Bt'ob. 6. -t5aben Sit !lne~l obet' !Bt'ob Y 6. 3m ~abe bad !Brob, Ilnb btT Scbmieb ~at bad !lne~l Y 7, -t5at bet' lllt'auet' ~Iet' obet ilileln Y 8. (it ~at ~ltT. !IDein, !lne~l unb !Bt'ob. 9 . .pat bet Sattlet' balS 2ebtT Y 10. 3a. n ~at balS 2ebet'. bet Sd)mleb ~at balS !BItt, bet @lafn ~at ba. !We~(, Sic ~aben balS @lad. unb 14) ~a&e bad !Brob.

EXERCISE 5.

1. What has the saddled 9. He has the leather. 3. Has the glazier the gold 1 4. No, he has the glass, and the smith has

• Thi. is true of nearly all languages. Many word. Mwever, though denoting the ... me objects, RrP. regarded in different language. R8 being of different ~cndero_ Thu .. for brig, tbe French, I. brie, Is masculine, while the Germ..." b I e IS t i 9 9. il 'eminine. For ,. head," the German, b e r Jt l' P f, ia masculine, the French, 14 tete, " .eminine, and the Latin Mpvt, is neuter,

t All nouD&, and the pronoun \Elr, of the second person, begin wilb a capitaL

16 lNTERROGATIVE CONJt1GATION 206 en, fa u fen, le •

.tiLe gold. 5. Has thesmlth the flour or the bread1 6. The smith hI¥! the gold, you have the bread, and I hale the flour. 7. Have you the leather I 8. Yes, I have the leather, the brewer has the beer, and you have the glass. 9. Who has the gold and the glass 1 10. The smith has the gold, and the brewer has the glass.

LESSON V

ttctfoa V.

INTERROGATIVE CONJUGATION.

'1. All German verbs are conjugated interrogahvely, in the present and imperfect, by placing the subject last, as in the case of the English verb to be ; as,

31l bet !!nann ~Ief Y Is the man here 1

!IDat bet !ll1ami ~Ief? Was the man here 1

~Clben @ile ba" ~ud! , Have you the book 1

@e~en @ile ba., mudl' Do you see the book (see you

the book!)

2. PRESENT SINGULAR OF 10 li e n.

AjJimw.tively. Interrogatively.

fd1 lote, I praise; lolie idj '? do I praise 1 (praise I 1)

Sir loben, you praise; 106en Sie? do you praise? (praise you?) rr lotit, he praises; lolit n? doeshepraise1 (praises he?)

3. PRESENT SINGULAR OF r a u ] e n, f cl1 n e i ben AND . t r I n fen.

ilf1 faufe, I buy; 6ie faufen, you buy;

n fauft, he buys;

icl1 fd)nelbe, I cut; itt trlnfe, I drink; Sie fd1ndben, you cut; Sie nhtfrn, you drink;

n f d]neibet, he cuts; n nlnft, he drinks.

4 . .PRESENT SINGULAR OF ~ l) r e n, f as e nAND b erfle~en. i1f1 ~are, I hear; id, fase, I say; icl1 bnfle~'e, I understand; efe~6ren,youhear; Sit faS£n, you say; Sle bnflt~'en, you understand;

er ~6rt, he hears; n fast, he saytl, nterfie~t',heunder-

stands.

(lifen, n. iron. Clnl\l.le'ber, either. Clfffg, m. vinegar. - .Rajfee, m. coffee. .Rom. m. cook. - !nom, nor. - Del, n. oil.- !lJfejfet, m. :e_epper. - <E'a1a, n. salt. !)enf, tn. mustard. - X~ee, m. tea. - 'lDajfer, n. water !IDem, neither. -~ .suder, m. sugar.

-~

0.18... 17

• EXERCISB 6. ,."dt 6.

1. UStt !auft bae (ilfen, unb !D~ !anft btt ~attltt' I. ~ e4!mlt~ !.mft bal! (iifen, unb btt SattItt fauft bae ~ebtt. 3. Xrinftn elt !BItt obet !lBein? 4. 341 ttlnre !Debet !BItt noel! fIDem, Iel! tria!t IBatftt. 6. !lBal! fauft bet !Btaun? 6. <it fllnft tntllltbtt .taftt obet Xflet. '7. !IDa. fauft bet .Roci1 Y 8. (it !auft Dd, crfllg, ~enf. 'ftftr. ~a(, nnb Budet. 9. fIDet fdJnelbet bae !Btob, unb 1V1l' flllntibet btt !Sattler! 10. I)tr .!tod! fdJnrlbet bal! !Btob, unb bet !Sattlet fd!ntlbet bll' ~ebtt. 11 . .ooten ~ie, IVaI! btt Slf1mleb fag" 1~. 3a, leb ~6tt unb I)erlle~t, lVae Sie fagen unb IVaI! tt fagt. 13. !lBal! fauft bet IIIaftt, unb !Det f(luft bal! (iifea? V

EXERCISE 7. ~Ur8dt 7.

I. Does the smith drink coffee or tea 1 2. He drinks neither coffee nor tea. 3. Do you buy bread or flour1 4. I buy bread and the glazier buys flour. 5. What does the smith buy~ 6. He buys the gold and the iron. 7. Either the brewer or the saddler cuts the leather. 8. I buy sugar and the cook buys vinegar, oil and mustard. 10. What does the saddler buy1 11. He buys leather and glass, and I buy iron. 12. Do you hear and under. stand what I say' 13. I hear and understand what you say, you hear and understand what I say, and what the brewer says

LESSON VI.

Itcti .. VI.

CUES.

1. There are four cases, namely: the

NOMINATIVB, which answers to the English nomi,..,.; the GENITIVE, which ans"ers to the English p688e.si"e:'; the DATIVE, which has no corresponding case in English, and the ACCUSATIVE, which answers to the English objecti"e.

2. The genitive may either precede orfollow the governing nuun : the latter arrangement being the more common; as,

(it ~at bae !Bud! bel! l5d!rt(erll. He has the book of the scholar.

((it ~at be. SiMlerl! !Bud1). He has the scholar's book.

m..te malf1 btd .oaufee III llelL The roof of the house i.s steep.

S. The dative without a preposition generally answers to our objective governed by to or for; as,

3eb "e&e bem .tInbe bal! @(a.. I give (to) the child the glaB8.

CIt m(4)t bem !!Ranne elnen .put. He makes (fO'T) the man a hat.

18 DECLENSION OF DEF. ARTICLE AND NOUN ••

4. DECLENSION OF DEFINITE ARTICLE MASC. ,AND N.H.

SINGULAR.

N asculille.

Neuter.

Nominative, 'ott, the; ba", the;

Ge1litive, be", of the'; be", of the;

Dative, 'oem, to or for the ; bem, to orfor the;

Accusative, ben, the; ba", the.

5. The article agrees with its noun in gender, number ana case.

6. German nouns have two forms of declension, called the old and the new. In the old declension the genitive, like our possessive, is formed by suffixing" (or es) to the nominative.

7. Nouns ending in el, en, tt, d)tn and Ietn form the genitive by adding s, while the dative and accusative are like the nominative, as: nom. 'ott Sattltt; gen. bee Sattltt"'; dat. 'oem Sattltt; acc. ben Silttltt, &c.

8. Nouns not ending in eI, en, er, d)en, and Iein, add e"* for the genitive and e* for the dative: the accusative being like the nominative; as, nom. ba" !8ud1; gen. bee !8ud1-ee; aat. 'oem !8ud)-e; acc. bae !8ud1, &c.

9. DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADDING' IN THE GENITIV ••

Masculine. - Neuter.

Nom. 'ott !Srubtt, the brother; ba" ~ifen, the iron;

Gen. bee !8rubtte, the brother's; be" (lifene, of the iron; Dat. 'oem !8rubtt, to the brother; bem ~ifm, to the iron;

Acc. 'Den !BfU'Dtt, the brother; 'Daet ij:ifen,t the iron.

10. DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADDING C' TO THE GENITIVE.

Masculine.

Nom. 'ott Wlann, the man; Gen. be" 9Rannt6, of the man; Dat. 'oem Wlanne, to the man; Acc. ben 9Rann, the man;

Neuter.

bae .Rinb, the child; bte Jtin'Dee, of the child; 'oem .Rin'De, to the child; ba"t .Rinb, t the child.

_ .. Word. of thi. elaM, aloo, often drop the e of the If""- and da/;,; as,,.,., be. !Bud}. ; dill. btm !Buill. This is espeeially true of word. of more than one .yllable, when the last i. not under the full aceenr: .... bel .tGufmann.; btm .ttaufmanll. lnatead of bet JrQufmanntl, btm .ttaufmanne • .toe.

t As in Greek and" Le.tiD, neuter wom. haye tbe II8IIIe form In the aceualift, u m me OOJDlDative.

#_:~~ .

• ~-::-:l.~

REsENT SING. OJ' 9 ehn, ftf1flfen, "0. II

11. PRESENT SINGULAR OF ottitn, ftf1llftn, ~D b er fllrtd] en.

Id) gebe, I give;

Sie geben, you give;

id) fd)ldt, I send; @lie fel)lcfm, you send ;

tel) t!,rf\lnell' e, I pro. mise;

Sle I)erjimdl'tn, yo. promise; eUerfl'dcbl', he promises.

er gibt (L. 33.6) he gives. er fel)ldt, he sends.

!l3.ider, m. baker. !l3auer, m. peasant. !l3tuber, m. brother. !l3uel), II. book. - (ie, n. it. - ~e~o'ren, conj, like ~oren, to belong. ~db, II. money . .out, m. hat. - .tlnb, n. child . .torn, n. grain.-!Dlann,m. man. IDlliUer, m. miller. - !!ling, m. ring. - @lcI1liler, m. scholar. @)o~n, m. son. @ltod, m. cane. - !Bater, m. father. !Bmau'fm, conj. like faufen, L. 5. 3, to sell. V

EXERCISE 8.

1. @ld)iden Sie bem @ldlmiebe ba' Ciifen? 2. !Jltln, t4) f4llcfe bem @(afa bae ~Iae. 3. @lel)lden @lie bem !l3rauer ba' .torn be' !l3auere Y 4. !Jlein, ber !l3auer fdlhft ee bem llJUiUer, ber IDliiUer fel)ldt bent !l3dder he IDle~l, unb ber !l3iider t!etrauft bent .todJe bae !l3\'ob. IS. ~e~6rt ber .put bent !Bater obet bem ®o~n? 6. mer .out ge~od bent @lo~ne, unb be\' @ltod ge~ort bent matet. 7. ~e&en @lIe bem IDlllnne bae ~elb? 8. 3dl ge&e ee bem IDlanne, unb er gibt' ee bern .tlnbe. 9. 9ilae fdJidt bet !Bauet bem !l3tauet? 10.!IDet I)errauft bem .toel)e ba' !l3rob Y 11. @e~o\'t bae (iifen bem @ldlmlebe ober bent ~(afer Y 12. !IDer gibt bem !l3tubet be' @ldjii(er' ben lJting, ba' !l3udl unb ben @ltodY 13. !IDa' l)erfvtedJen ®Ie bent !l3dder, unb \\la' t!erflltidJt bet !l3dder bent .tlnbe Y 14. merfllredjen @lie bem @lel)lilet ben DUng Y lIS. !Jleln, tel) "etfl!nd}e

bent IDlanne bae ~elb. '

EXERCISE 9.

)'fOllh 9.

1. Does the book belong to the brother of the baker! 2. No, it belongs to the peasant's son. 3. Do you promise the child the money 1 4. No, I promise it to the man. 5. Who sends the miller the grain 1 6. The father of the scholar sells the miller the grain. 7. What does the man sell to the scholar 1. 8. He sells the scholar the book, the cane and the hat. 9. What does the baker send to the cook l 10. Does the cook give the baker the money~ 11. Who sends the saddler the iron 1 12. Who sends the baker the flour I 13. The child's father gives the brother the ring. 14. The iron .belongs to the smith. 15. The cook sends the mille) the grain, and the miller sells it to the brewer.",

10 DATIVIl WITH PR.EPOSITIONS. S", tel e n, f 0 m men, ..a.

LESSON VII.

&tctfn VII.

THE DATIVE WITH PR.EPOSITIONS.

1. The relation of the dative to words which precede it, it often expressed by prepositions "; as,

(it lommt au" bem ~aufe. He comes out of the house.

~4! ge~e nadl bem !lIlalbe. . I am going to the forest.

~tt ~rubet ge~t mit bem .ltinbe ~u The brother goes with the child

bem 2e~tet. to the teacher.

~ef Jtne4)t fommt llon bem !lnatfte. The servant is coming from the market.

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

2. For the three forms of the present and imperfect, found in English, the German has but one; as,

, ,

ire, ge~e, I go; I do go ;

<Sie ge~en, you go ; you do go ;

er 9c~t, - he goes; he does go ;

I am going; you are going; he is going.

S. PRESENT' SINGULAR OF f-l' i den, fomm en, AND fdJ.fel&en.

Idl j))lele, I play; Idl fomme, I come; Idj fcl)ttflie, I write;

45le fl1lden, you play; 45le fommen, you come; 45ie f4)tellien, you write; ee fi'lelt, he plays; et fommt, he comes; er f4)fefbt, he writes.

9lmtmcum, m. magistrate. 9!:l1fel, m. apple. 9!:u." out of, from.mel, with (L. 55). ~leinift, m. pencil. ~tief, m. letter. -morf, n. village. - .oau." n. house. ~u.b, m. dog. - 3dget, m. hunter.!lnatft, m. market. - !lneifet, n, knife. !lnit with (L. 57). - 9lad), to (see 1. note). - mon, from, of. - !IDalb, m. forest, woods. !IDann, when, !IDo~nen, to live, res~de. .su, to.

EXERCISE 10, _

~Uf8dt 10,

1 • .tommt bet 3dget a~ bem !IDaTbe, au" bem ~aufe, obet ll.on bem !lnadtt' 9. (it gt~t enttoebet mit bem ~auer nad) bem motfe, obet mit bem .tlnbe au bem !!mtmann. 3. !IDa., fdlnelbct bet 6d1i11et mit bem !lneifetY 4. !IDet fl1lelt mit bem ~unbe 1 5. 45l1lelt ba" Jtinb mit bem Eidlmlebe 1 6. !IDo~nt bet 3dget bef bem !lnilUet, obet £lei bem 'Bdcfer? '7. met 6d1lilet fdltelbt ben ~rief mit bem ~lefnlft. 8. 6d1neibet ba~ .tlnb ben 9!:l1fel mit bern !lneiftt be" ~tubeT" ? 9. !Refn, e" fdJneibet ba"

• A prepositioD i. required with the dotlve after verhe indicating direction 101DM'<U an object; n CI ell being employed before tho name of a pl .... and ! II before the name ora pen""; a •• er Rf~t n CI a} bem ~orft, anb i~ orbr I u b~m l!r~rer, be is gei ... 10 \he Village, aad'1 am going 10 the teacber.

D •• ONlnATITB PRONOUN ••

It

ilroll mit bmt !Rttrn be. m.ltn'. 1 O. lIe~en Ele III belli e.ttler. DItt na~ btm motfe? 11. mn !lJUtUet tlIo~nt bel bem ~QUtt, nnb 9'~t .. brm @id)ftlet neut) bem motte IU bem !lmimann. 12. !!Dann geflm Eit Ra~ bem motfe ~ann ge~en Sle au bem !lmimann. nnb tlIat 8fM Sit bem !lmtmann?

'" EXERCISE 11. ~'f."t 11.

1. Who is coming out of the forest1 2. Is the hunter coming from the market, or is he going to the village 1 3. Does the scholar live- with the miller, or with the magistrate 1 4. Who is going with the child to the glazier 1 5. Is the man cutting the bread with the knife of the saddler 1 6. Are you writing with the magistrate's (L. 6. 2) pencil 1 7. Who is playing with the dog! 8. Who lives with the miller and who is going with the scholar to the peasant 1 9. Who is going to the forest, and who is going to the millerl 10. When is the child going_to the smithl 11. Whendoea the hunter go to the forest 1 12. When does the hunter come from the forest; and when do you go to the village 1 13. The cook is coming from the market, and I am going to the magistrate.

LESSON VIII.

Itdi .. VIII

DEHONlITRATIVE PRONOUNS. !I) I e f e f AND !t e n e f.

1. !Dlefer refers to the nearer and jener to the more remote of two objects: when however an object not remote from the speaker is alluded to, and no comparison is made, blefer is often used, where "that" is employed in English; as,

!!)Iefet !mann Ijl relell, unb jenn 1ft TAu man is rich, and ,/aal (one·'

ann.' is poor.

tilet 1ft blefet !mal11t? Who is that man 1

2. DECLENSION Masc. Neut.

N. bierer, bleft~, this; G. biefe!, 'oiefe~, of this;

D. 'olefem, 'olefem, to or for this; A. biefm, 'oiefe~, this;

OF '0 i e fer AND j en e f, 81NGUL.U.

Masc. Neut.

jener, jme!, that'; ieneG, ienei, of that;

lenem, jenem, to or for that; jenen, ienei, that

8. Like 'oiefer and lener are declined those indefinite numerals, and adjective pronouns, which like the definite article, have a distinct form for each gender: namely; aller, Clllt~, all; dniger, einige~; etUd}er, etIid}e~, some; jeber, ie'oe~, every; man-

.. For ""..,. after a pl'OlIOUD, or an acIlectlve, no coml\lOumuy, 'fil)t~ ~ \~~ ...

GermllD.

22 .. RESENT SINO. OF fein, fieen, AND liegen.

dier, mandie~, many a; fola,er, fola,e~, such ; and welcljef, we{. cf]~, which.

4. PRESENT SINGULAR OF f e 1 n, f i i e n, AND I leg en.

ia, bin, I am; ia, fiie, I sit; ia, liege, I lie;

<Sie finb, you are ; <Sie fiien, you sit; <Sie lieSen, you lie;

er itl, he is;. er fiit, he sits; et liest, he lies;

!,lUIet, all. Vln, at. Vluf, on. - !Baum, m. tree. - (i~e, adv. before (soe ~ot). - Wenliet, n. window. - @aden, m. garden. @rcji, great, large. @ut, good. - .plnte~, behind. - 3n, in. - 3ebet, see list 3. - !J1e{)en, beside. - Dfen, m. stove. - !jJalllet', n. paper. - !JleldJ, rich. - @ita~l, m. steel. - @ite~en, to stand; conj. like ~ettle~en, L. 5. 4. @itu~l, m. chair. - Xifd), m. table.Ue{)et, over, above. Untet. under, among. - mot, prep. before, see eie. - !!Ba~t, true. - Simmet, n. room. Sl1llfdJen, between.

EXERCISE 12.

J\ufollbt 12.

1. !!Beldlen .punb ~at blefet IDlann' 2. (it ~at ben (junb bet! 3dgett!.

8. 3n I1lcIdJem .pQufe 111 bet @iafet' 4. (it 111 tu bem .p!Jufe jenet! !Bauet~ 6. 21egt bat! !Bud) aUf blefem obet aUf {enem XlfdJe? 6. (it! .lIegt auf jenem, unb bat! !jJalllet lIegt untet blefem. '7. 3jl jebet IDlann teidJ? 8, 3ft jebet! .paut! gtoji' 9. ~Iefet! Jtinb l1lo~nt In [enem .paufe. 10. ~Iefet IDlann fi~t aUf bem @itu~le al1: belJl Wcnjlet. 11. ~et .punb lIcgt al1lifdJell bem Dfen unb bem XifdJe. '12. ~et !Baum fte~t ~ot bern .paufe, unb bet @arien lIegt ~Intet bem .paufe. 13. (it fd)tel{)t, e~e et fllieit. 14. ~et @io~n lle~t ne{)en bern mater, 15. ~at! Simmet bet! elilllle .. t!' Ijl n{)et bem Simmer bet! !lmtmannt!. 16 . .pallen @iie foldlet! Cllfen obet fold)en @ita~l , 1'7. 3d) ~a{)e ben @italjl bet! @iattlet'. 18. 3jl Qller @italjl gut , 19. tIDat! et faqt, 111l1!a~r.

EXERCISE 18.

,Jufadt 18.

1. Has this hunter the dog of that peasant? 2. Which book has this man 1 3. In which garden is the brother of this glazier 1 i' 4. Is all coffee good 1 5. Which pencil and which paper have ". you? 6. On which chair is the book lying, and at which table is the man sitting1 7. Is the dog under that tree1 8. The tree stands between the house and the garden, 9. This room is over the room of the scholar. 10. Is every tree large 1 11. Have you such tea, and such bread 1 12. Has every smith such iron 1 13. Is the peasant in this house 1 14. In which room is the stove 1 15. Which man is in that house 1 16. In which house is the peasant l 17. Is the book lying before the scholar? 18. Are you going before he comes? 19. He says you have the paper: is it true?

t

t

.. DEFINITE ARTICLE. POIIII.IV. PH.N.U... •

LESSON IX.

Itdl .. IX.

INDEFINITE AR TICLB.

1. The indefinite article is less varied than the defiDite: !laving, for the nominative, masculine and neuter, but ODe fonn; as,

Masculine, tin 9Jlann, a man; tin ~ifd), a table.

Neuter, ein ~nb, a horse; tfn ~ud), a book.

POSSEISIVE PRONOUNS.

2. The possessive pronouns constitute a distinct class of words, agreeing, like the article, with the noun in gender, number and case, and answer to our persONJl pronoun in the possessive; as,

,

UIlo III melu -out? Where is my naU

(ir ~at meinen oOnt. He has my hat.

3d) ~aoe elum -OUt tlon meinem Wmmbe. I have a hat from my friend.

3. The indefinite article and the possessive preaoune (unlike the words in L. 8. S.) take an additional syllable in forming the oblique cases. Except the accusative neuter. (See L. 6. 9. Note.)

4. DECLENSION OF INDBF. ART. AND poss. PRON. SINGULAR.

Masc. Neut. . Masc. Neue.

Nom. tin, dn, a; unfn, unfn, our;

Gen. dnee, tinel, of a; unfme, uufme, of our;

Dat. etnem, dnem, to or for a; unfetem, unfettm, to or forour;

Ace. etnen, dn, a. unfmn, unfet, our.

5. Like eln and unfet, are declined bein, thy; tUn,/our; i~t, her, their; 3~t, your; meln, my; fein, his, its, an fein,.". DO, not any.

mrett, n. board. - !I)mn, for. elber, but. -!I)old), m. dagger."ruer,n. fire. Wreunb, m. friend.-oOammer,m. hammer. o!)o6el,m. plane. oOof. m. court, yard. - 3~r, see list 5. - .!tIlU, cold . .ltamm, m. comb. - 2cucl)ter, m. candlestick, 21d)t, n. candle. - IDleijcl,' m. chisel. - !Jlferb, no horse. !lI1lug, m. plow. !Bult, n. desk. - @ldll11ert, n. sword. ee~t, very, very much. !tlfd)ler, m. cabinetmaker.jciner. -metter, m. cousin. -ilBatm, warm. !IDofcIJI 'ifd), m. washstand. !ll.letter, n. weather .

..

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS

EXERCISE 14. ~llr8dt 14.

1. ~at 3~r iYteunb ein @)d)l1led ober einen mold) ? 2. mleln Wreunb ~at eln laud), unb fein metter ~at einen !lnei,el. 3. 3ft unfer Wrennb ht ullfenn ~aufe ? 4. !Rein, er iii in bem Simmer feineG metter" be. ~Ifd)ler'. 6. lIDer ~at ba' ~Id)t meine' IBruber" 6. met eo~n mei. ne' metter, ~at ba' ~id)t unb ben ~eud)ter 3~te4 laruber'. 7. ~at ba' .tinb ben ~ammer felne, mater' Y 8. !Rein, e' ~at felnm ~ammer. 9. met ~Ifd)ler ~at [elnen ~obel unb feln larett j eie ~aben 3~r IIlfen unb 3~ren ~ammer, unb id) ~abe mein !Vferb nnb melnen !V~Us. 10. 3jl 3~r \Jreunb in 3~em, in felnem, ober in melnem ~aufe y 11. 3~t \Jreunb Iii In 3~rem ~aufe j mein \Jreunb ~at mein !Vfetb in meinem G)at. ten, unb [etn .tillb fllielt mit feillt1ll ~unbe In bern ~ofe. 12. ~Iest 3~t laud) aUf ~~tem ~ifd)e, ober auf mrlnem !pulte Y 13. !lnein laud) liest aUf melnem ~ifdJe, unb mein lateililft Q11f 3~tem $nIt. 14. ~Iest mein Jtamm auf melnem !pult! 15. !Rein, 3~t Jtamm liest aUf 3~rem lIDafd). tifd)e. 16. 3jl e' falt In 3~tem Simftler' 17. meln, eG ijl fe~r l1latm, bmn id) ~abe ein Weuer ht melnent Dfen, unb ba' lIDetter ijl nicljt fe~t faIt.

EXERCISE 15. ~llr8"t 16.

1. Who has my horse and my dog'J 9. Your brother haa your dog, my father has your house, and the cabinetmaker has your table. 3. Has the child its brother's lmife, or its father's pencil t 4. It has its father's pencil, its brother's book, and your cousin's plane and chisel. 6. Is the miller in his house, or in the house of his friend 1 6. He is in the house of our friend the baker. 7. Has your friend's father my brother's horse 1 8. No, he has no horse, but he has his candle and his candlestick. 9. Have you your friend's chisel, or his hammer1 10. I have his plow and his horse, and my cousin has his dog. 11. Have you a stove and a candle in your room 1 151. Yes, I have your brother's stove, my candle, your candlestick, and my brother's ring. 13. Have you a horse or a dog1 14. No, I have neither a horse nor a dog. 16. Has lOur brother your desk1 16. No, he has no desk, but my desk 18 in my room in my friend's house. 17. It is cold in my room, for I have no fire in my stove; the room is very large, and the weather is very cold.

LESSON X .

'uti .. X.

. NTERROGATIVE PRONOUNSI

1. The interrogative pronouns are ttler1 who? ttleld)er'l which? or what? (declined like biefer, &c., L. 8), tIl4'· (indeclinable) what 1 and tIla' fu~ tin 1 what kind of a, or what 1

• JD,ji falM> ItIrfftll) sometime. OCCUI'8 118 the genluve of lila'.

j INTIiRROGA rIVE PRONOUNS. .3 e man '0, !n I e man b. 25

2. DECLENSION OF ID e t AND ID a tI f ii t e t n.

Masc. Neut.

N. wet? who? lDaGfunin? lDaG funtn'l

G. weffm? whose] lDaG fiit dnetl1 lDaG fUf eineU

D. Item? to, for whom? lDaG fut einem1 lDati fut einem9

A. wm, whom? lDaG fut einm? lDaG fUt etn 1

8. JIDd is sometimes separated, by other words, from fUt tin; as,

mas til biee flit efn (jau.,' What kind of a house is this,

4. ~elt (con~action of lDeldJet), and lDaG fut ein, are also

used in exclamatiqn; as, .

!IIlelcl) (or \llae flit) em IRltfe! What a giant!

5. ~G is sometimes used instead of lDatUm'l why? as, w!lilae memt t~tIDllibcl)m, lllalUm Why (what) weep 18 maidens •.

&9t Iljt 9Be£&et!" why complain ye matronsl

6. 3emanb answers to "anybody, somebody", and dnlaG to "anything, something." !ntemanb answers to "not anybody, nobody"; and ntd1tG to "not anything, nothing"; as,

3emanb ljat meln ~ucl). Somebody has my book.

(iat 3emanb mefn ~udj Y Has anybody my book 1

(iat n t cI) t 3emanb mefn ~Ud) Y Has not somebody my book t

(iat n ntcl)t etll!ae! Has he not something 1

(it ~(lt nlcbt.,. He has nothing (not anything).

3d) felje Dltemaub. I do not see anybody. (I see no--

body).

7. Cittoatl is sometimes abbreviated to "lDatl"; as,

Sci) 9@t \llae <htee. I have something good.

8. DECLENSION OF 3 e nt a n 'o.

Nom. 3eman'o, anybody ,

Gen. 3emanbG or 3MtlanbeG, anybody's or of anybody;

Dat 3emanb or 3eman'Dem, to or for anybody;

.Ace. 3emanb or 3eman'Den, anybody.

'U em an b is declined like 3emanb; etlDaG and nid1ttl are in·

declinable. .

9. @af (organ3 unb oat) before a negative answers to Clat all" after a negative; as,

3d} ljn'&e gat uldjt.,. I have not anythi:lg at an.

Cit ljat gat feln @ttl> He has nn money at all.

- (Ie til gat nld)t 1alt. It is not at all colO.

2

26 ADJECTIVES OF THE OLD DECLENSION

!1l&et, but, however. _:. !B(ed), n. tin. - (itlua!!, see 6. - @ar, Bee

9. - Seman!>, see 6. - Sebt, now. - .itiife, m. cheese. .!tein, not any, no. .itl'lfer, m. trunk. .!totb, m. basket. - 2efen, to read. 20$ ben, to praise. - roMer, m. painter. - !Jlid)t~, not anything, nothing. !Riemanb, not anybody, nobody. - ed)u~. m. shoe. eo, SO, as. -

~raurig, sad. -lllJarum', why. -

EXERCISE 16. ,-u'sobe 16.

1. !IDer lobt ben @idliiler, nnb lIlen lobt ber ed)IHer Y 2. 3emanb lobt ben <Edlitler, aber ber edlliler lobt lJllemanb. 3. !IDelfen !!iud) lefen eit

_ jrbt Y 4. Sd) ~abe gar feln !Bud,. IS. (iaben ele dill a" in ~~t'em .ftorbe Y 6. !Jlein, idl ~abe elma!! in melnem .!tolfer. 7. !IDem geben @iie ba" @elbY 8. Sd) gebe !Jliemallb ba!! @elb, aber Id) gebe 3emanb ba!! !B~dJ •. 9. 3C$ manb ~at melnen @idlu~, unb leb ~abe Semanbi! ~betfdluq. 10. !IDa., fllr Rafe l)aben @iie aUf 3~rem Xifd)e Y 11. Sd) ~abe gar feinen .!tlife. 12. !IDen Icben @iie1 13. Sd) lobe !Riemanb. 14. (iaben eie nldlt!! in 31)rem .R~lfer 1 15. !Rein, gar nldlt.,. 16. !IDa. fagt 3~r \Jreunb, ber IDtaled 17. (ir fagt Bar nid)t!!. 18. !IDarum flnb @iie fo traudS' 19. 3d) bin gar nid)t trauds. 20. IDtit lila!! rlit elnem IDteliet fdlneiben ef 3~ren ~~ren 21. 3dl ~abe feinen ~fel unb fein IDtelfer. 22 • .8u

lIlem se~t ber @idJitler 1 .2S. (ir ge~t ill !J1iemanb. •

EXERCISE 17.

",'soh 17.

1. Whose pencil has your brother, the painter 1 2. He ~ the pencil of his friend the scholar. 3. Has anybody your horse 1 4. Yes, somebody has it. 5. Does anybody praise your brother 1

6. Somebody praises my father, but nobody praises my brother.

7. What kind of paper has the scholar l 8. He has no paper at all. 9. To whom do you give your money 1 10. I do not give it to anybody. 11. With what kind of a pencil do you write 1 12. I write with the pencil of your cousin. 13. Have you anything in JOur hat 1 14. No, I have not anything in my hat, but I have something in my trunk. 15. To whom is the child going1 16. It is not going to anybody. 17. Somebody has our horse and our plow. 18. What kind of a shoe is this 1 19. It is the overshoe 'of our friend. 20. Who has my book l 21. Nobody has your book. 22. Has anybody anything in your room 1 23. Ye8, somebody has something in my room. ..-

LESSON XI.

FORMS OF THE ADJECTIVE.

1. Adjectives when used'predicatively,* are uninflected; as,

mer @ita~l ill ~(lrt. The steel is hard.

!l}a., (ilfen Iii ~art. The iron is hard.

• Tile terms attributive and predicntlve have. ill Cramm.lf. a flLrictly conventional ~ tmd BbocJld be di.linc!iy understood. If we my, Ihe Iko.\> ,i.e, is b .. N ~ tief·.

ADJECTIVES OF THE OLD DECLENIION.

27

t. "'ben, however, adjectives are used attributively, they are subject to three modes of inflection, called the old, the new, and the mixed declensions.

3. Adjectives, when not preceded by one of the words in List L. 8. 3. or 9. 5, are inflected like ~ieftf, (L. 8. 8.) and are then of the

OLD DECLENIION.

Masculine. 1V"tJuter.

Nom. gut-rt, 9ut-t~, good;

Gen. gut-~, (en") 911t-~, (it en) of good;

Dat. gut-em, gut-em, to or for good;

Ace. gut-en, 9ut-e~, good.

4. The e of the terminations el, en, er, is generally dropi"ed

when, by inflection, another syllable is added; as,

(ir ifl dtd. He is vain.

Ciitl-et \Stela (not elt-eler), Vain pride.

5. ENDING OF THE OLD DECLENSION IN THE NOMINATIYJI.

Attributive. Predicalive.

<Muf-tt \sta91ltl ~arf. Good steel is hard.

<Muf-t' Cilfen Itl 9ad. Good iron is hard.

-oad-et \Sfa91ltl gut. Hard steel is good.

-oart-t' <lifen Ijl gut. Hard iron is good.

6. Adjectives which qualify the neuter pronouns, ettuatl, lIlal and nid]t~, are inflected according to the old declension, and are written with a capital initial; as,

3m 9a&t e t", a' \Smonef. I have 80mething beautiful.

Cit fagt n i 41 t, \sdlltd)te8. He says nothmg bad.

lSie fprfmen llon e t '" a' !!leuem. You speak of 8ometl4i1l{f new.

9ll a' 9a&en Sit !!leue' Y What have you new Y

!lilt, old. Vlu'\1ene9m, agreeable. Vludl, too, also. - !B(an!, bright. elau, blue . ....:. ~elll, fine. ~iitttrn, to line. - @el&, yellow. @efee, n. law. @rau, gray. @ro&, coarse. @tiin, green. - 3mmet, always, ever. - .!tonig, m. king. - IDlamen, to do, make. IDlantel, m. cloak. - !!leu, new. - !Xod', m. coat. - \Sammet, m. velvet.

Slug ill ~in). the adjective deep (tte] e), i. attributive; for the qunlity depth i. referred to, un. known nnd reco,l(nized attribute of the river. If we soy, the river ia dfoep here (bet ~luj ill birr titf), the adjective i. predicative, for we then merely

aIIIrm or predicate of the river. thllt it ba. Ihe quality depth. ,

• The genitive or tbe old form i. now se Idom used; thal of the 1I.t1D (om\ \><>\'" .,..r~rrod 'rbu6, 0111 til e/ol~I'; Ollt-ell (fijeIl3, &c., instead of 1\\\\-\' 1l!>\1I:1\\'" ~'Il.\. "fIi/i'nl, &c.

28 ADJEC'JIVES OF TH~ NEW DECLENSION.

edllemt, lad. emneiber, m. tailor. e41u~'ma41er, m. shoemaker • Sd)lllad), weak. Stad, strong. - Xud), n. cloth. - mJeid), soft.

EXERCISE 18.

)il'SII.bt 18.

1. !Diefe~ ~eber 1ft selb, unb fme., 1ft f41lllatA. 2. 341 ~abe gelbe., ~tf bet, unb Sie ~a&en fd)lllar~et!. 3. 3ft bet ®ein bee ~auere aU obet neu , 4. 3ft aIter ®eht hnmer ftarf unb neuer !IDein fmmer fd)llladl? 5. (jll&en eie !laden ober fd)llladlen mJtfn? 6. 3d) ~a&e flarfen. aUen !IDein. ullb bet ~auet ~Ilt neue" ~Iet. '7. 3ft baG Wifen be" Sd)mfebe" gut ober fmlemt ~ 8. mer Sdlmleb ~at sute" unb aud) fdlledlte" <iifm. 9. mer @idmeiber mad)t ben !Rolf uon feinem grauem Xud)e. 10. lDet IDlann flitted ben IDlantel mit srobem blauem Sammet. 11. met .t6nig fdlrelbt bM @cfe~ mit blanfem Sta~l unb fd)l1latAein Wlfen. 12. mer Sd)u~. mad)et madlt ben Sdlu~ tlon gtitnem 2eber. 13. 31l Illeld)e., Wlien gutY 14. :'la, unb lIleid)er Sta~llil fdJled)t. 15. (ja&en Sle guten St!lf1l ober fdlledltee Wifen? 16. met mJeln III aU unb baG ~iet ill neu. 17. <it ~at alten !IDeln unb neue" ~Ier? 18. Se~r Illarme". mJettet III nidlt alll Rene~m. 19. IDleln !1lolf III uon fd)lllaraem Xnd)e. 20 • .paben Sle gu. tee !IDalTer, guten .tlife unb gufe., ~tob Y

EXERCISE 19.

)."lIh 19.

1. Is your cloth black, green or blue ~ 2. I have black cloth

. and the tailor has blue cloth. 3. Has the shoemaker green, yellow or black leather1 4. The shoemaker has black leather, and die saddler has yellow leather. 5. Has the blacksmith good steel, or good iron 1 6. He has good iron. 7. Do you line your coat with green or with blue velvet1 8. The tailor lines my coat with blue velvet. 9. Is your wine strong or weak 1 10. I have neither strong wine nor strong beer. 11. New wine is lotafways weak, and old wine is not always strong. 12. Have you good bread and good coffee 1 13. I have good bread, but my coffee is not very good. 14. Is very cold weather agreeable i 15. What kind of weather is agreeable t 16. Warm weather is agreeable. 17. Is good steel alway!'! hard, and is good iron always soft; 'J 18. Wh) has the smith soft steel I 19. Why has the tailor old cloth!

20. Why does he line your coat with green velvet 1 .

LESSON 12.

S'tctin 12.

ADJECTIVES OF THE NEW DECLENS.ION.

1. An adjective when preceded by btt, biefef, aller, einistr, rtHd}t't, iebt't, [ener, mand}t't, fo(d}t't, weJdTer (relating to the noun that the adjective qualities) is inflected according to the

ADJECTIVES OF THE NEW DECLEN8ION. II

NEW DECLENSION.

Mucultne.

N. bet gut-e, the good;

G. be6 guten, of tho good; D. btm guten, to, for the good;

A. ben guten, the good; -

Neuter.

ba6 gut-e, the good; be6guten, of the good;

bem guten, to, for the good; ba6 gut-e, the good.

'- .

2. ENDINGS OJ' THE NEW DECLENSION IN THE N':IlINATIVE

Attributive. Predu:ative.

IUn ~art-e eta~( III nl'tOfid). All hard steel,p! usefuL

¥tlle" liatt-e (flfen III nl'tOfid). All hard iron is useful.

!lln nl't,Ud}-e eta~( Illliart. The useful steel is hard.

!l)a" niitUd)-e (flfen III Jjad. The useful iron is hard.

!l)lefn fd)on-e !Boge( 1ft ",dB- This beautiful bird is white.

!l)lefl" fd)on-e ~a~let IIlWeiP. This beautiful paper is white.

(liniger felit !JUt-r mldn. Some (a little) very good wine.

(llnlge" nld)t feJit feln-e !tud). Some not very fine cloth.

3eber gtit-e !nann III el/dlcf1. Every good man is honest.

3ebe" gut-e .!tinb III e~dld). Every good child is honest.

3enn eJidld)-e !nann III gut. That honest man is good.

3m'" e~dld)-e .!tlnb III !JUt. That honest child is good.

!Dland)et· gut-e !!nann III ann. Many a good man is poor.

!Dland)e" !JUt-e ,tinb ill ann. Many a good child is pOO!'

!Beld)n fcbled)t-e !!nann ill gll'tIflId)Y Which bad man is happy. !!Beld)e" fd)led)t.-e .!tlnb III gliilfllcf1 Y Which bad child is happy!

!Inn, poor. - !BUtn, bitter. - ~umm, stupid. - \Jlelplg, diligent, lndustricus. - @erbn, m. tanner. ~(l'tcflld), happy, fortunate. - 3ung, young. - .!tIe in, little. -1\eJjtn, m. teacher. £eliding, m. apprentice. 1\leben, to love. - !nand)n, many a. !lJlenfd), m. human being, man. - ed)atf, sharp. ed)en, beautiful, fine. eeJjen, to see. eto(a, proud. - !ttl'ige, idle, indolent. - Un'gll'tcfllcf1, un·. fortunate, unhappy. - !IDagen, m. carriage, wagon. !ID1rfl1d), really. - .suftle'ben, contented, satisfied.

EXERClBE 20. ,.,.oh 20.

1. ee~en ele ben gropen .eunb untet biefem gropen maum' 9. 3d) felie ben gropen IBaum, abet nld)t ben .eunb. 3. !IDem ge~ort blefe" fd)ilnr ~au" nub blefet fd)one !IDagen Y 4. ~a" .eau" ge~ert bem alten 3l'iget,

• IInllnd)er, folclltf a~d I1lrld)er aometlme. drop tbe final syllable; the adJective that follows being inflected (see 1.. II) according 10 tbe old declenaion; a •. mnn,d) ar. mer IDl\lnn (instead of mand)er arme IDlann); many a poor man. IDlnnd) lIute • .tinb. (instead ofmnnd)r' illite ,Rillb); Dlany a good child. ilBdd) fd)~nel !ZBet •

. tn! (in.tead of I1lrld)r' fll!~ne Wdter); what fine wcathllt \ E)\'M~ \'t~\\\ <x."" lm.-! 01' rl1/~1 81116, Zll~}; web COAIlI8 cloth.

10 AD1ECTIVES OF THElllXEDD ECLENSION.

unb bet' !1ilagm gel)ott bem ungIillflicben Wteunbe biefe., teid)en IDlitltm. 5 . .pat bet jIdjige ~e~ding bet! gnten @olbfdlmieM bat! fdlatfe IDlejfrt bet! aUen ~e~mt! I obet ba" aIte !Bud) be., trligtn @id)itlett! ¥ 6 • .pat bet junge @etbet bat! gellie obet bat! fdJlllatae ~ebet ? 7. lit ~at bat! fd)lllatae; n ~at aucb ball gtime Xud) bet! alten @id)neibett!. 8. ~et @iattlrt ~at bat geloe ~cbet unb bet @icbl ~mad)et ~at ball fcbll)arae. 9. 3ft aner alte !JBeln

. fiatf, uub aUet! neue min bitter? 10. 3ft jebet teld)e IDlann lllitHid) au' ftiebcn Y 11. IDlllncbet bumme IDlrnfd) Ijl fiola. 12. 3d) fe~e ben gtopen, fd)onen maum In bem fleinen @atten bet! amen mauer". 13. ~a" fleine .!tinb UeIlt unb lobt ben alten !Wann. 14. ~iefet junge IDlann ~at ben fcbatfen IDleijjel [enes jleijilgen Xifd)lmt 15. Wlitted bet aUe @id)neibft ben neuen IDlantel mit bem blauen Xud)e' 16. Xtinft bet anne IDl:nn . bat! faIte !1ilajfet ?

EXERCISE 21.

1. Have you the black cloth or the blue? 2. I have the black, and the young tailor has the blue, and also the green. 3. ·Has the . old man the old horse and the old wagon? 4. 'I'his idle scholar has the good book of that industrious scholar. 5, Which young man has the new book of this little child f 6. To which poor man do you give the good money?l Is the young peasant going with the old hunter to the village. 8. To whom does this old horse belong? 9. Does this old wagon belong to the old baker? 10. Which good leather has tile good shoemaker, the blue, the green, or the black? 11. Many a good man is very poor. 12. Not every poor man is unhappy. 13. -which diligent scholar has the new bo~ 14. This very warm weather is not very ~eable. 15111as the rich peasant the good dog of the good hunter! 16. The old tailor lines the old cloak with the old cloth.

"

I"ESSON XIII.

Itctin XIII.

ADJECTIVES OF THE MIXED DECLENSION.

• 1. An adjective when preceded by eln, mrin, brin, fein, {~f{

':afn, Wtt, fdn (relating to the noun that the adjective qualifiesl is inflected according to the

MIXED DECLENSION.

MtUculine. Neuter •.

N. meln gut-tt, my good; meln gut-e8, my good;

. G. mdne8 guten, of'my good; meineB guten,of my good;

D. mrinem guten, to my good; melnem guten, to my good;

A. mdnen gulen my good; me in gutee, my good.

2. As already seen, the above words, tin, meln, &c. [unJiJls bt't; baD, &c. L. 8. 8), do not indicate the gender of their .

\.

tlONNECTED VIEW OF THE OLD DE(lLBNSION. 81

nouns: this, however, is effected by means of the adjectiTe; the termination er, being masculine, and ~, neuter i as,

Masculine, eln flein-edlnann; [ein gut-rr !Sru'ott;

NBUter, tin f{ein-e~ Bin'll; fein gut-e! !llfn'o.

s. ENDINGS OF THE MIXED DECLENSION IN THE NOMINAT~.

Attributive. Predicative. •

(lilt gut-n !R(lI~n 1ft e~did). A good man is honest.

(lin gut-e" .!tinb 1ft e~did1. A good child is honest.

eeln e~tlldl-et ~teunb 1ft gut. His honest friend is good.

eein e~tlid}-e" .!tlnb 1ft gut. His honest child is good.

!lleln fdJiin-et !Bogel ift tllelp. My fine bird is white.

!llein fdliin-e" $a\1iet 1ft It!eip. My fine paper is white.

!Dein tlleip-et" !Bogel 1ft fdloti. Thy white bird is fine.

!DeIn me!p-e" $a\1iet ift fd}on. Thy white paper is fine.

~~t gut-et" IBtubet ift gtOp. Her good brother is large.

~~t gut-r" .!tlnb ift gtop. Her good child is large

Unfer grop-et IBaum 1ft fdlon. Our large tree is fine.

Unfer glop-e, .pau' 1ft fdJiin. Our great house is fine.

iner att-rr Jtolfer 1ft grim: Your old trunk is green

iner aU-e' IBanb 1ft grlin. Your old ribbon is green •

.!ttln tllitflfd) gut-er !Rann Ijl faut. No really good man is lazy.

·.tein gut-e' .ItInb ijl fauL. No good child is lazy.

4. CONNECTED VIEW OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS.

. A. gut-en (@)tQ~l);

NEW. J(~D.

, MlUculine. ,

N.gut-tt (@)tQ~l); 'ott gut-e (@)ta~I) ; mein gut-tt

• (@)ta~l;)

G. gut-e! (or -en) (~ta~rG); btG gut-en (@)ta~r!); mdneB gut-en (@)ta~re; )

D. gut-em (@)ta~l) ; 'oem gut-en (@)ta~I) ; meinem gut-en

(@)m~l) ; ben gut-en (@)ta~l); melnm gut-en

. (@)ta~I).

Neuter.

bat gut-t (~!fm) ;

N. gut-tt (~Ifen);

mein gut-d (~Ifen); G. gut-e! (or -en) (~If~n!)j beB gut-en (G:!fcn~); meineB gut-en (G:!fenB);

D. gut-em (G:ifen); 'oem gut-en (G:!fen) i melnem gut-en

(G:ifen) ;

baB gut-e. (G:ifen) j mein gut-e.

\.~\\t\'\),

OLD.

A gut-e! (G:ifeu) j

•

1

Ii

81

SPEAKING AND WRITING GEItMAN.

I

metg, m. mountain.-!I)ad), n. roof. !I)1(f, thiCk,large.-Waul, lazy, idle. - ®ebul'big, patient. ®efd)icft/, skillful. ®elUif/fen, n. conscience. - 3e, ever. - .!tameel', n. camel. .!telfer, m. cellar • .!tiffen, n. pillow, cushion. .!timfUer, m. artist.·_ !.llad)'lapig, negligent. !nil~lid), useful. -@)anft, soft, mild. @)d)(l~, m. treasure. ®d)u~, m. defense, protection. ®tamm, m. trunk, body. ®teil, ~ep.-!t~ier, n. animal, beast. Xief, deep. !tren, faithful, trueUn'3uftieben, discontented, dissatisfied. -mogel, m. bird.

EXERCISE 22. ,".f8Ith 22.

1. 311 3~r guter ~eunb, ber gefd)lcfte Jtim~(cr, nod) (L. 66.) ein lun. get !!nann 1 2. 3a, et i~ nod) [ung, aber fein glltet Wrellnb, bet 2f~m, itl . eln fe~r after !!nann. 3. 3jl tin. reid)er IDtann immer efn 3uftiebener unb angelle~mer !!nann Y 4. VleIn, unb tin armet !mann Itl nid)t immer dn un3uftiebener !!nann. 5. ~at 3~r f!elnet lBtubet elnen f d)onen Heinen mogel Y 6. !neln, er ~at ein fd)onel! f(eine~ !J.lferb. 7. 3l}t neue't1 ~a'" ~at eln jleile!! !I)ad) unb elnen tiefe*(er. 8. (iill 9Jlte~ ®eroijfen ijl eln fanfte~ .ltijfcn.q<iin treuer ~teun. in jlarfer @)d)n~ unb ein gtopn @)d)aO. 10. <iin<!leiler merg jle~t ~inter unferm 'neuen ~aufe. 11. Un. fet ueues ~aul! jle~t Uot elnem jlei(en metge. 1"2. Unfer after ~\!fe{baum lIat einen bicfen @)tamm. 13. 3jl ba!! gcbu(bige Jtamee( ern nuOlid)e. XlJletY 14. ~aben @)ie feln gute~ miet unb feinen guten !liMn? 15. 3d) l)abe sute~ miet, aber relnen guten !lIJein. 16. 3jl ein guter @)d)iiler je faun 17. lneln, et ijl roebet faul, nod) nad)ldjig. 18. 3d) ~(1be tin Ilene' mud) unb er ~Ilt eln aIte!!. (L. 8. Note),

EXERCISE 23. ,".faah 23.

1. Your good friend has your good iron and your good steel.

2. Is your old friend still in the small garden of our good cousip'

3. No, he is in our large garden with his old teacher. 4. Has our young cousin your new book and his old pencil? 5. No, he' has your old book, his new pencil, our good stove and my green table • .- 6. A little yellow bird is sitting on the . steep roof of your new house. 7. Is your old friend a skillful artist? 8. Yes, he is a skillful artist, and a very agreeable man. 9. The patient camel is a very strong and a very useful animal. 10. My young friend has my young horse. 11. Our old friend has our old horse in our old garden. 12. A rich man is not always a contented and a happj man. 13. Is a poor man always a discontented man? 14. Is I lazy man ever contented, or an industrious man ever discontented 1 15. My lazy scholar is discontented.j;-16. Have you nO.JIJlM cheeseY 1'. I have good cheese, but no good bread. 1B.,#0.

have my new book and I have his old one. (L. B. Note). . ,

LESSON XIV.

Itctlou XIV

SPEAKING AND WRITING GERMAN.

Guided by the instructio~ thus far given. the pupil may DOW prontably enter upon tho practice of ~f!ea"i_ g and writill"

r

SPEAKING AND WaITING GBall.&Jf.

98

German. For this purpose, every sentence in the foregoing Lessons, may be regarded as a Model: the learner applying III every case the principles which the model sentence is designed to illustrate." An ample stock of words, in addition 10 those already acquired by the learner, will be found page ]90, and following. In this and in the English vocabulary,

7 page 21" are contained all the words of the subselJ'"m EXERCI ES. Also, for the sake of more convenient reference, ilie words of the preceding exercises have been included ill the same vocabularies.

Obs. As a want of familiarity with the various endings, especially those of the adjectiJe, (they being the most difficult,) is a great hindrance to the right use of German, the pupil should give to the following exercise the utmost Attention.

EXERCISE 24. .JarS"" 24 •

...r: Xltftt gldn~mber 6dJnee llegt (luf bem gtUnm WeThe. 'iL.. ~(I~ stUne Wdb liegt unter tiefem 6d)nee. ..3, ~et tlefe @id)nee lIegt (luf grii. nem (jr(l~. ..... (jrline~ (jra~ lIegt unter bem tlefen @iellnee. ...If, Jtelu tiefer 6d)nee lIegt aUf unferem grnnen Welbe. 8. Unfer gtUneil WeIll liegt untee feinem tlefen @id)nee. 1q • .poten @SIt jenell rei~enbe 2ieb? '8, IDlein fieiner !Bruber fdJenft bem fielnen Jtinbe elnen fieinen flipen ~I!fel. 41. ~r lIell (L. 33. 6) 3~r gropell !Bud) mit groprm !Jer\!_nilgm. +o. IDlein fltopell lPfetb ilt In melnem sriinen Welbe.· -H. ~a" grope lJIferb meine" altcn lnaellbat" ill In bent grojien grlinen Welbe be" alten !Bauer". lj. !Det gute \Jreullb be" alten 06d)neiber" ge~t mit eem alten IDliiUer nctdl bem ptn ®albe. 13. IDlein gutet Wreuub, bet (lUe @id)nelber, beeft [elnen alten Xifd) mit tot~em Xud)t.t4. 3d) ~abe gute" 2ebet \lon bem gulen ~bet. 61e ~aben ball· gule 2ebet bell guten @iattletll, unb bet gule @idJu~madJer ~at rein gutell 2ebet. +It. ~all faIte .meltet beeft ben breI< tm WIu; mit glattem (it.,.

EXERCISE 25.

~ar'llbt 25.

1. The green grass lies under the deep snow. 2. The deep snow lies upon the green grass. I 3. Deep snow lies upon the green field of our old friend. 4, The deep snow lies upon the broad field. 5. The little scholar reads with great pleasure the large book of his good friend. 6. Green grass lies under deep mow. 7. The good book of my good friend lies on the good table. S. Your old friend the old teacher, is with his old friend in the green field. 9. The large horse is in the little garden of our good neighbor. 10. My good dog goes with our good neighbor to the large green forest. 11. The cold weather covers the

.. For I\mher remark .. and iIIuBlrnl;ons nfthis plan, see "N~w \\<I\\\()I\",~.~. ~"l..')."''' III ~FIUlllulle" French CnUtB8 ", P. p. :;9. ~67.

• 2*

'.

'-t,

84

PREPOSITIONS.

river with anooth ice. 12. The glittering snow covers the gree. forest anc the green field. 13. MyoId friend the old saddler covers myoId trunk with old leather. 14. Has the good friend of the goc d smith good iron and good steel I 15. He has good iron and steel i he has also a good dog and a good horse.

LESSON XV.

lieu .. xv.

PREPOSITIONS.

1. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING TD DATIVI:.

. Illu~, aufjer, tiel, lilnnen, entgegm,_steenutig.,_gtmlifj, mit, nad;, nlid;fl, nelifi, oli, fammt, felt, !l01l,3U, anaaullltber, govern the

dative only. •

2. PREPOSITIONS GOVIDBMNG THE ACCUBATIVI:.

~urct;, fur, eeeen, o~ne, fonber, um, and wlber, govern the

accusative only. .

3. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE.

Illn, auf, l1intcr; In, nelien, !ilier, unter, !lor, and ~wlfd;en, go."ern the dative, when used with verbs of rest, or with those .irdicating motion witkin specified limits i and the accusative, ... hen motion or tendency towards any place or object is indicated; as,

at liiuft In bem (Marlen. He is running in the garden.

(it liiuft Itt ben (Maden. He is running into the garden.

lI)a8 !Bud} liegt auf bem Xlfd}e. The book lies on the table.

3d} lege bad !Bud} aUf ben Xifd}. I lay the book upon the table.

(it III In brm .fiaufe. He is in the house.

Cit ge~t In bad .fiaulS. He goes into the house

. 4. Prepositions are frequently contracted with the definite article into one word; as,

9(m (for an bem), (it ji~t am Xlfdle. He sits at the table.

9(n" (for (In bad). (it ae~t and \Jenllet. He goes to the window. Ilufd (for au] balS). Citlellted aUfd !Brett. He lays it on the board. !Belm (for bel bem). (it III bei~ !Btubet. He is with the brother. lI)Utd)' (" butd} bit'). (it ge~t butd}i8 ijelb. He goes through the field.

Wilt' (for fllt bad). (i, ill fitt' .tinb. It is for the child •

.fiintetm(,,~intet bem).Cit Ile~t~llItmn .saun. He stands behind the fence.

3m (for in bem). (it lfilm .fiaufe. He is in the house.

3n, (for In ba,). (it ge~t In' .pail'. He goes into the house.

lllom (for een bem). (it fommt uom!1natfte. He comes from the market. .sum (for au bem). (it Be~t aumijteUnbe. He goes to the friend.

"_ .

NEGATITB CONJUGATION.

16

EXERCISE 26.

~.r'lIh 26.

I. !Del' aIte !lnann ge~t In~ neue .pau' unb ba~ neine JtInb ge~t " 'en fleinm @ntten. 2. !lnein altet \Jteunb ~~t cu] bem aUell @ihl~l a~ bem fleinen \J~nilet unb legt ba~ !Bud) aUf ben :tifd). 3. !Da~ ttccfene oW liegt ~intetm .ofm uub ba' fleine Stinb ge~t ~Intet ben .of en. 4.-.bat1 roeipe !lJlWier liegt neben'bem nltm !Bulf1e untet bem tunben :tifd)e. 6 • .Del' mabe @:d)alet legt fein roelpe' !lJlWiet neben meln alte' !Bud) UII> 1ft ba' gmne :tud). 6. !Da~ neue .paut1 jle~t abet bem tfefm SteUer. 7. ~M fltine muntere !lJfetb f\ltingt flbet ben tiefen @tabclto 8. !lnein gut~ ~a~i'r licgt au] bem :tifd)e llCt bem jungm !lRanne. 9. lir legt b(l~ gute !lJa\1iet llcr ben jungm 9Jlann Aroifd)cn bat! !Budl unb ba' @(a~. 10. !Da" !lJa\licr lfegt Aroifd!ea bent !BlIltJe uttb bem ~Iaft. 11. !Del' aUe 3ager ge~t um bat1 Ueine \jelb unb bUTdI ben grcim mJalb; er ~at droat1 Sd]one' fflr fetn fleine!! Stinb. 12. Sd) ~abe nid)t' flit bm Saget. benn er iit lIid)t meln \jreunb. 13. mJ~ fagen @iie gegen ben jungen .pclliill> ~r Y 14. 3d) fage, er III fe~r lI.~oflid) gegen (L. 56.) Meinen \Jreunb. 14. mJo~nen ele bel (L. 55. 2.) S~ttm .o~eim Y 15. !!Bann ge~en @iie nad) .paufe? (L. 57. 3.) 16. ~e~t bet !Dienct au bem @id)u~mad)et obet au bem @id)neiber? (L. 62. 2.) 17. lit ge~t au feinem metter, unb fein. !Btuber &lelbt au.paufe. (L. 62. 3.)

EXERCISE 27. v ;..r8I1h 27.

1. Is the old friend of the old captain standing at the window, oris he going to (L. 53.) the window 1 2. Is the scholar putting his wood on his stove 1 3. No, for the wood is lying on the stove. 4. The little child is standing behind the large stove, and the faithful old dog is going behind the stove. 5. Is your brother in the house or is he going into the house 1 6. The teacher lays his pencil beside his book: the child stands beside his friend. 7. Our room is over the room of our old uncle. 8. The old horse is standing under the tree and the young man is going under the tree. 9. The poor old beggar is stariding before the house, and the rich young man is coming before the house. 10. My table is standing between the store .and the window. 11. The horse is going between the house and the garden. 12. Does the young man live at his cousin's 1 13. Are you going to your brother's. 14. No, I remain at home. 15. Is your friend at home' 16. Yes, he is at home, and I am going home.

LESSON XVI.

lectin XVI.

~EGATIVE CONJUGATION.

1. As in interrogative sentences (L. 5.), so also In nega. bve ones, German verbs are conjugated, in the \lt6a6n.t and

imperfeot, without an auxiliary j as, .

..... _

-~~ , .

NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION.

3d) ~a'6e nld)t. (it ge~t nld)t. (it lji nid)t ~ier. 2iebe nid)t.

1 have not.

He goes not. (He does not go.) He is not here.

Love not. (Do not love.)

2. ~icl}t, when relating to a transitive verb commonly 11.1- lows the object of tha.t verb; but when that which is in one clause denied, is in another affirmed of a different object, the

particle n i cl} t, precedes; as, .

3d) ~Me e" nld)t. 1 have it not. (1 have n't it).

3d) ~abe baG laud) nld)t. 1 have not the book, (the book

• n8l).

(It lobt felnen <So~n nld)t. He does not praise his 8(')1.

3d) ~abe nid)t baG laud), fonbetn 1 have not the book .but the pen-

ben lBlelfiift. eil,

3d) lefe nid)t baG lBud), tIldd)eG <Sic 1 do not read the book that you

{efen, fonbem eln anbereG. read, but another.

8. ~on'Dem occurs only after a negation and introduces the reverse of the negation; while

mbef may follow either a negation or an affirmation, and marks simply something additional; as,

(ir lfi nld)t teid), fonbern atm. He is not rich but poor.

(it iji nid)t reid), abet jiola. He is not rich but proud.

Cit iji teid), abet nld)t fiola. He is rich but not proud.

4. micl}t b)a~t1 not true 1 (is it not true 1). answers (like the French" n'est ce pas 1") to our various interrogative phrases . after an assertion; as,

<Sle fennen i~n,) You know him, 'do you not Y

Cit lfi 3~r lamber, He is your brother, is he not!

Cit ~at e" ge~abt, He has had it, has n't he1

eie tIlirb ge~en, nld)t tlla~t Y She will go, will she not 1

UDir fonlien ~aten, . We can hear, can we not?

elt jinb ttid), . They are rich, are they not 1

elt jinb nld)t reid), They are not rich, are they Y

The interrogative, nlcl}t b)a~t1 sometimes precedes the assertion; as,

lJUd)t tlla~r? er Ijl fe~r rcld). He is very rich, is he not t

NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION.

6. Nouns of this declension ending in unaccented at, e, tl, or er, add n in all the oblique cases; as, nom. 'D~ Ungat, the Hungarian; gen. 'Det! Ungatn; dat. 'Dent Ungatn; ace; 'Den Un •

.. :~

T

."!-

NEW DECLENSION.

Nouns of other terminations add en; as, nom. bet GJtaf, the count; gen. b~ @taf>u; dat. bem @rafen; acc. 'Den @tafen.

NEW DECLENSION.

N. bet meffe, the nephew; bet Solbllt, the soldier;

G. b~ meffen, of the nephew; 'Drl8 Solbaten, of the soldier; D. bem meffen, to the nephew; 'Dem Solbaten, to the soldier;

A. ben meffen, the nephew; ben Solbaten, the soldier.

EXERCISE 28. ~ar9llh 28.

1. !!)et @taf I~ nld)t ~ imanb, fonbetn bet ~elnb bel !lJTin~lIl.

2. !!)et Jtnabe (obt ben 60lbaten nid)t. 3. <if (o&t nidlt ben 45o(bllten, fcnbem ben lInattofen. 4. (it (obt ben lInanofen, abet nid)t ben 6clba. ten. 5. !!)et @tled}e if'. bet !nCldl&at, abet nld}t bet ~eunb be" ~iltfen. 6. !!)et mij~me I~ nldjt lUIt ber'!nad)bat be" malern, fonbem andl be" @)a4l.fen. 7. !!)et aIte 6cfbat fd)tel&t felnnn 9le!fen, bem [ungen !!Ratto. fen, lI'nen mtler. 8. !!)et junge lInattofe ~at elnen !litief Ilon felnem D~eim, bern aUen 6olbaten. 9. !!)iefet teldle aIte !Ruffe ~at elnen 6dallen. 10. !!)et 6dal!e fd)lad)tet ben Ddjfen felne".omn. 11.!!)et Jtnabe fllielt mit bem ~tfen ur.b bern mdten. 12. !!)et !!)eutfd)e fauft ben !IDein be" ~aRaofen, unb bet ~tanaofe fauft ba~ ~ud} be~ 1)eutfd)en. 13. 1)iefet Jtnabe iil bet !neWe be" @tafen. 14. 1)at1 !IDettet III nid)t warm, abet angene~m. 15. 1)Qt1 !IDettet III nid)t warm, fonbern fatt. 16. 1)iefe' ~ud) III nid)t Intetejfant, f~nbetn langroeilig; e" III nidjt interelTant, abet (e~mldJ. 17. !IDeldjen Untetfd)ieb finben 61e aro1fdJen ,,91ldlt jebe" InterelTante mud) III (e~tteldj" ullb ,,3ebet1 InterelTantc mudllji nid)t le~t. reid) 1" 18. 1)iefet !nann Ijl eln muffe, nld)t roa~t Y 19. 6ie '~Clben

lIIein mudj, nldjt ro~t Y _

EXERCISE .29. ~ar9llh 29.

1. Wby is the Bohemian the enemy of the Bavarian 1 2. He is not the enemy but the friend of the Bavarian. 3. The Saxon is

the neighbor but not the Bohemian. 4. Not the Ger-

man but the H of the Russian. 5. The

Frenchman praises the is the enemy of the Rus-

sian. 6. The boy has nephew of the old soldier.

7. Has the Greek the or has the Turk the land

of the Greek1 8. Who is ox of the sailor l 9. Has

the nephew of the count a an ape 1 -10. The weather is

not cold but warm: it is but not pleasant. 11. The little

boy 'ftas the hat of the sailor. 2. Not the soldier but the sailor has the little boy's book. 13. Is not every instructive book interesting¥ 14. This book is instructive, do you find it interesting, or tedious1 15. Is not every instructive book tedious I 16. Hi! is going to the man, is he not ¥ 17. You understand what I say, do you not Y 18. Your cousin has a good horse, has he not Y

...

88 FEMININE GENDER. DECLENSION OJ' ART. AND PRONOUNS.

LESSON XVII.

"tell .. XVII.

v

FEMININE GENDER.

l. In the feminine, the words contained in List. L. 8. 3, and 9. 6, all end in e : namely, aUe, bie, biefe, einige, etlidje, (cbe, jene, mandje, f oldje, and tveldje: beine, tine, euere or eure, :~re, 3~rc, msine, [elne, unjere, and feine. These words have all the same form of inflection.

•

DECLENSION OF ARTICLES AND PRONOUNS. FEMININE

N. bie, the; bitft, this; tine, a; melne, my;

G. ber, of the ; bief et, of this; tiner, of a; metner, of my; D. btr, to the; biefer, to this; elner, to a; meiner, to. my;

A. 'Die, the; biefe, this; eine,8.; melne, my .

• 2. Feminine nouns, in the singular, are indeclinable,"

8. Appellations of females are formed from those of males, and titles of women from those of their husbands, by means of the suffix in (or inn); as,

bet Wreunb, the friend; ble Wteunbln, the female friend;

bet· ~d)ret, the teacher; bie 2e~tetin, the preceptress ;

bet (!ngldnbet, the Englishman; ble (ingldnberin, the Englishwoman; bet@emll~l, the consort (husband); ble @ema~lin, the consort (wife);

b~t @idJiiler, the scholar; bie @idJiilerin, the female scholar ;

bet 2iillle, the lion; bie ~iilllln, the lioness;

bet ~tafibent', the president; ble !lltajibenlin, the president's wife;

btt .obetjl, the colonel; ble .oberjlin, the colonel's wife.

ADJECTIVES IN THE FEMININE GENDER.

4. When an adjective in U. feminine is not preceded by one of the words in the above List (see 1.), it is inflected like biefe, and is of the

OLD DECLENSION.

N. G. D ..4..

sut-t, good ;

gut-tt, of good; gut-tt, to, for good; gut-e, good;

(bitf-e) (bief-tt). (bief-er). (bief-e).

f djon-e, beautiful; fdjon-tt, of beautifulx fdjon-tt, to, for beautiful; fdjon-e, beautiful .

• Noullll of Ibis gender were formerly decli"';d al\er the new declension. 10 certala· pbl'8lle8, as also in poetic language. these .ndin~s are still fouod in the dative. aod CK'aNonally in the ge.,itive; as, !I)u foOtt Cluf ~rbrn fiir micl! Irusen (elf}iJlnl; ...... IbaIt wilDe. for De upon earth. I$elller StlUfU I5lf}lIIeiler; hie wife·. ~81

ADJECTIVES IN THE FEM. GENDER. NEW DECLENSION. as;

.~.

5. Feminine adjectives, when preceded by an article, or by a word of like declension (see 1.), are inflected according to the

NEW DECLENSIO~.

N. 'Die gut-e, the good;

G. 'Det gut-en, of the good;

D. 'Det gut-nl, to, for the good; A. 'Die gut-e, • the good;

EXERCISE 30.

meine gut-e, meiner gut-en, meinrt gut-en, melne gut-e,

".'SII" 30.

my good; of my good;

to, for my good; my good.

1. mie I5timme bet !JlncbtfgoU 1ft t'el~enb. 2. !Ndne ~reunbin ~ott bie tlladltigaU mit gtoffet ~trure. 3. I5dlrtiben eie mit blauet abet mit fdllt)aT~et Xinte Y 4. 3dl fdlteibe mit 3~m fdllllar~en Xillte. 6 .: Glc. ~ulb iil eine .ltunft unb elne Xugenb. 6. <iinnalbt gibt gtoje !l1l(ldlt. 7. mie I!iebe elner !Nuttet 1ft lJt'elIaenlo*,. B. mie @;onne fagt mit fitjiet etimmt: "idl bin bie Jtonlgin bet <itbt!' 9 . .pat 3~te ~teunbin biefe &1(llIe Xinte !lOll etnem !Jladlbat abet !lon einet !Jlad)badn Y 10. mie !IJlujif In biefet fcbiinen. gtotien .ltitellt ill fe~t gut. 11. .pat bie flelne :rodltet biefet fellonen mame bit neue .lette melnet' flelnen 15d)lllejiet 1 12. !Neine flelne ~ouline fd)enft bet Xante tine tot~e !Refe. unb bet !IJlutttt eine. Illeije I!ilie. 13. ·mie jieijjige !Biene ji~t au] bet buf: teuben mlume. 14. 3~re edlWejict ~at 3~te neue I!aml'e in bet

.!tiime. 15. gu roem ge~en l5ie. au 3~m !muttet abet au 311m

!iante Y 16. 3d) ge~e mit nteinet I5dllllejiet In bie ettlbt au unfem

~oulint. 17 • .paben l5ie tine neue @abel unb eine alle Xalfe 1 lB. !Jlein, iii) ~abe elne neue ~ebet unb meine I5dll\lejiet ~at gute Xinte. 19. 3d) ~abe gftujlige !Jlad)tl4)t !lon melnet ~teunbill, ~rau lID. (see L. 6B)"I

EXERCISE 31. ".fSllh 31.

1. The sister of my friend has a beautiful rose. . /. The teacher has not much patience with the scholar. 3. Do you write with black ink! 4. I write with the black ink of my sister and the new pen of my cousin. 5. Whose new watch has your sister l' 6. You have my sister's watch, have you also the new chain Y 7. The industrious bee loves the fragrant rose. 8. The nightingale has a charming voice. 9. Whose love is boundless 1 10: Who has my good lamp and my new pen 1 11. Have you favorable news from your friend 1 12. In which church is your mot\lerY 13. My sister is Writing our cousin a letter. 14. Does your aunt live in the city1 15. Does the bee love the lily? 16. The daughter of this old lady is my teacher. 17. The mother is in the kitchen, the daughter is in the church. 18. This music is not good. 19. This scholar is going to the teacher. 20. This lady is our neighbor. 21. My mother hears this news with great joy. 22. The rose is a beautiful flower. 23. I give my little sister a little rose. 24. The mother is going with the daughter

into the new church. .

. . ._ .

FORMATION OF DIMINUTIVES.

LESSON XVIII.

It c t f on XVIII.

FORMATION OF DIMINUTIVES.

1. The terminations djen and rein suffixed to nouns give rise to a large class of words, called diminutives. These are always of the 'neuter gender, and generally take the Umlaut (L. 2. II. Note) if the radical vowel be capable of it;

bet {lugel, the hill ; ba~ {lugcld}en, the hillock (little hill);

bM ~amm, ' the lamb; ba~ ~dmmdJen, the lambkin (little lamb);

ber ~(uV, the river; ba~ ~l"lvdlen, the rivulet (little river) i

ba~ lBudJ, the book; ba~ lBudllein, the little book;

bie ~rau, the woman; ba~ ~rdulein", the young woman.

2. The diminutives are often used as terms of endearment, or familiarity, and are likewise applied to objects where, in' English, no idea of diminutiveness would be expressed; as,

mdterd)en, (dear) father, IDlutterdJen, (dear) mother.

maG miigleln fingt feln fto~e~ ~Ieb. The little bird sings its joyful

d)en. (little) song.

FORMATION OF COMPOUND NOUNS.

3. In German, many compound nouns are formed, (often with change of termination of the former) where the English equivalents are connected by a hyphen, or where several separate words are used; as,

Sd)tcibllallier (from SdJreib-en and !llallier). Writing-paper.

!llreVfrei~eit (from !llreffe and ~rei~eit). Freedom of the press.

~afil~ier (from ~aft and X~ier). Beast of burden.

!IDa~rljeitGnebe (from !IDa~r~ritand 2iebe). Love of truth.

Strolj~ut (from Stto~ and {lut). Straw-hat.

4. 'The first word of. the compound takes the accent, anil

the latter usually determines the gender; as,

mer lBlumengarten. The flower-garden.

mie @artenblume. The garden-flower.

mie Sd)ilbl1ladJe. The sentinel.

Eurptit1ll8: bet fltbfcbeu; bie fltllmut~; ble !Ilemut~; ~ie @ro6mut~ ; bie I!III1BmUI~; bie <SlInftmuti); bie ($d}l1)etmut~; bie IIDtl)muti}; bllG @eBent~ei1; bae {linttttbeil i baG motbett~eil.

5. The latter noun may be connected by a hyphen to' one or more preceding words; as,

mer Stiefel- unb Sd)uljmadJer. The boot and shoemaker •

.. The words ~rliulfin and IDNibd;!tn, though regularly formed a s diminutives, have lost their strict diminutive signification. The former signifi es a j'oung (unmarried) lady, and serv •• ao a title of addrc ••. answering to the English word III is. ; as, ~rdu. Itin !.n. ill i}itt, Mi .. N. i. here. IDNibd)tn corresponds to girl: \lnaob, from whicb llJliibd}rn ill derived being now chiefly employed in the .ignification of "servant".

GBNDER OJ' NOUNI.

EXERCISE 32. )'fOllh 82.

1. !I)a~ muntere lDogdd)en fie i aUf bem !8dumd)en unb fingt feln ft~~e. 2iebdlen. 2. ~al5 Jtltdbdlen ~at ein fd)one6 !8udllein In [elnem mum .ltiitbd)en. 3. mlli5 2dmnuben fl'tingt uub fl'ltlt aUf bem fonnigen ~u!lr(. men. 4. mat! !IJldbd)en fudlt tin fd)cnet! !81umd)en fut bat! hanfe !Bru. berdlen. 5. ma6 .!tndbd)en bllul [elnem ~unb41en ein ~aut!d)m. 6. ~rliu. teln !R. ill bie ~reunbln melner @)d}l\1eller. 7. miefet! IDllibd!m lit fr~r rdd) unb fe~r l\1o~lt~litig. 8. ma~ ,ltllmeel III eln \!ajUl)ier, Ilbet fein (L. 52. 11.) Sugtf,ler. 9. mat! !llferb ill ein 2allt~let unb audl tin .suS' t~iet. 10. mer .od!l5 1ft eln Sugtl)let unb aud) eln @)d)llld)ttl)lct; Clber fein ~alltl)ler. 11. milt! @)d)l\1ein III nut eln @)d)(ad!tt~iet. 12. mel .punb ift ein .paut!tl)ier unb bet 9Dolf 1ft eln !Raubt~ier. 13. mer 20l\1e 1ft ein gropet! unb ber ~ud)t! ift tin fleinet! !Rllubt~iet. 14. mie liid)e Ijl ein fdJonet, nu_licl)et 9Dalbbaum, Ilber feill .objlbllum.

EXERCISE 33. "a,gllh 83.

1. The little boy plays with his little dog. .2. Miss L. has the little book of the little girl. 3. The little brother. of the girl is ph ying with the little lamb. 4. This young lady is very benevalent but not very rich. 5. Is the camel a draught-animal 1 6. No, it is a beast of burden. 7. The dog is not a beast of prey and the wolf is not a domestic animal. 8. Is the ox a beast of burden Y 9. No, he is a draught-animal. 10; Is the horse a draught-animal, or a beast of burden 1 . 11. The horse is a beast of burden and also adraught-animal, 12. Is the oak a fruit tree or a forest tree 1 13. The oak is a beautiful forest tree. 14. Is no forest tree a fruit tree 1 15. The little dog plays with the little lamb. 16. The boy has a beautiful little tree in his garden.

LESSON XIX.

Itctin XIX.

GENDER OF NOUNS.

1. As already seen (L. 4. 2.), some words are regarded as differing in respect to gender from the objects which they represent. Other words, on the contrary, as is usual in English, mark the real gender of their objects. Hence arises what is termed the grammatical, and the natural gender. •

2. In respect to appellations of persons, the grammatical, is the same as the natural gender. .

Euepti .... : !D1l' lllJeib, and diminutives (1.. lB. I.), as alIO lOme compound noullP (L. ia 4.>.

3. To the masculine gender belong

a. NAMES of days, months, mountains, points of compass seasons, and stones ; as,

bet IDlontag, Monday; bet ~~rj(, April; bet ~a~, the Hartl bit iJlorb, north; ~er ~rltr)lIng, the spring; bet !Rubin, the ruby.

GENDER OF NOUNI.

b. N OUNIl whose final letter is the same as the root or-

the verb from which they are derived; as,

bet IBtlldj, the fraction, from bredjen, to break;

bet ~(lIp, the river, from fliepen, to flow;

bet ~llIg, the flight, from fliegen, to fly ;

ber ~auf, the course, from laufen, to run; -

bet @)djIlP, the shot, from fdjiepen, to shoot; bet Xrunf, the draught, from ttinfen, to drink; bet !Iillldjt!, the growth, from lUadjfen, to grow.

4. To the feminine gender belong

Q. NOUNS formed from the roots of verbs, by adding ~t,

e, te, or t; as,

ble @)Vtadje, the language, from fIlttdjm, to speak;

bie ,Sierbe, the ornament, from a!eren, to adorn;

ble \Jludjt, the flight, from jlie~en, to flee ;

ble GJabe, the gift, from Reben, to give;

ble @)d7tift, the writing, from fdmiben, to write;

ble GJebutt, the birth, from gebdttn, to bear;

bie \Jalte, the fold, from falten, to fold.

b. NOUNS ending in el, ~eit, in (or inn), fe~t, f~aft and

unS; Ri!'

ble (;mdjelel, the hypocrisy; ble .tinb~elt, the childhood;

ble (;elbin, the heroine; ble Ciitelfelt, the vanity;

ble lJreunbfdjaft, the friendship; ble Uebung, the exercise.

5. To the neuter gender belong

Q. NOUNS beginning with the augment ge, those ending in ~en, Iein (L.IS.), ni~, fal, [el, and t~um, as also all words not properly nouns, but used as such; as,

ba' <Sdlitffal, the fate, destiny; ,baG @ebddjtnip, the memory;

ba. !Rdt~fel, the riddle; ba. !Bipt~um, the bishopric;

ba6 (ir~abene, the sublime (L.23.1.); ba. 2efen, L.35.3. the (eading.

EueptiD'M: MA8CULIN.., @ebraud;J, @ebclIIfe, @e~cllt, @enu~, @lerud;J, @efang, @efd;Jmacf, @ejtanf, @el1)inn, 3rrtbum, !Reid;Jtbum, lIDCld;JGt~um.

F'J:JOlIllII:, lBtbrangni6, lBefiimmernip, l!3eforgni6, lBetriibni9, I!3t11)anbni', fImlIflingni6, QrfI'Clrni&, ~rlaubni9, IJdulni9, jJinflerni9, Jtenntni;, lIDilbni;. !triibfal I. either feminine or neuter.

b. NAMES of countries and cities; as, ~djlUebetl, lBetli'n, (;ambufg, <sadjfen, !l)re~ben, &0.

, Eueption.: those ending in ei are FEJOlIlNJ:, and a few others are ILUCULIB •• ~.llfINB.

c. NAMES of metals; as,

ba. @olb, ba. <iifen, baG JtuVfer, ba' IBM, bat' <Silber, &0.

Further exceptions to the above rules will best be learned

bf careful observaticn in reading. .

I

,

GENDEll OP NOUNI; EXEJlCrl., .c. ..

6. Some nouns have two genders and are employed in dif. ferent significations; as,

bfl' !Banb,' the volume ; J)a~ !n.lnb, the ribbon;

bfl' !Bauet', the peasant; bQ~ !Biluer, the cage ;

btf !Bunb, the alliance; bad !BunD. the bundle;

bit (frltnntnip. knowledge ; bQ~ (Jrfennlni,. decision (judiciaUj

ber <nbe, the heir; bad tiTbe. the inheritance ;

ber @e~alt, the contents; bild CMe~(llt, the salary ;

ter .peibe, the 'pagan ; bie .peibe, the heath ;

bet' .Runbe. the customer; bie .RulI~e, the news;

ber !l.nenf~, man; human being; bad !l.nenf~, vile woman ;

bet' !Rei~, the rice; bad !lteld. the twig;

ber @id)i1b, the shield; bad @id)i1b, the sign;

bet' \See, the lake; bie @iee. the sea;

bet' <stift, the peg; bad @itift, foundation (charI-

table) ;

ber !t~eII, the part ; bad X~eiI, the share;

ber X~or, the fool; bad X~or. the door;

ber merblenft, the profits; bad merbltnft, the merit.

7. Generic names of animals may be of either gender; as, ber ~ucfld, the lynx; bie Siege, the goat; ba~ @iebaf. the sheep;

ber \5ifd), the fish; ble Qluller, the oyster; balf .pu~n, the fowl;

ber .pafe, the hare; bie .p"ant, the hyena; bad ~ferb, the horse; bet' tllabe, the raven; ble Xaube, the dove; bad X~ler, the animal.

EXERCISE 84. j\ • r 9 lib t 84.

1. ~cf) liebe btu \lrrl~1inB' ben @)ommet' unb ben .perbli, abet' nlebt ben !Dinter. ~. !l)er Smaragb ill gri'tn. ber !ltubin ift tot~. 3. !l)er !l)lantant III fel)_r ~art. 4. !l)ie (iiteUeit ill oft eine !ncgleiterin bet \Jau(~elt. 6. !tIie !l)onau ijl eln fe~r langer \JIu,. 6. !tIad bleltberil~mte !!lem liegt all bet' Xiber. '7. !tier Sd)lllan 1ft eln gro'er, unb bie (inte ill eln fleiner Sd)lI1imm~ogel 8. !l)et .pafe Iii eill furd)tfamed, ble .!ta~t eln fdllaued, unb bad (Jid)~iSmdlen ein munttted X~ler. 9. (iln Svtldlblert fagt:

"Utbung madlt bell !lJltiller". 10. 3ebet' gutt !JntnfdJ ~a't .peud)elelunb \Jil(fd)~eit. 11. !l)a~ .!tinb ~at ben erftrn !nanb blefed fIDerfed unb aud) bad neue !nllnb bier,d !l.nabd1ru. 12. !l)cr (Jlevl)ant, ba~ .!tametl, ~er Xiger. ber 201l1e, bie .p"ane, bad !Jla~~om, bad \JIu'vferb, bad .Rrofobit. bie !ltlefenfd)(allge. btr Strau' ullb bet ~arabied\logeI Ieben In einem ~ei' jen ~·ilnbe. 13. !tier !nar, ber !Dolf. bet \Jllcbd, bet' .pare. bad .Ranilld)en, ~\ld !ltelmtl)ler. bad Sdlaf. ber !niber. bie .Q1e.mfe. ble @and unb bie (illte leben In einem faUen ~allbe. 14. !tier IlIraber nennt bad .RamH( b(\~ edJtjf ber !IDlijlc. 15. !tier @id)liler ~at In [einem Simmer elneu Dfrll. elnen Xlfd1, elnen Stu!)l, elne ~am~e. elnen .R~ifer, einen SVieAcI, till !llult, ein SoVI,a, einen XeVVicb, cine @id)aufel, elne ·Sange, ellle \Sdlecre, finen !nlei~ift, elne \leber. eln Xlntenfa, unb guted ~avier. 16. !tier .Rod) tiluft baG .pu~n, bad 2amm, ba" .Rlllb. ble Xaube, bell ~il(, bie ~oreat unb ben 2ad)d. 1 '7. !l)er !nauet ~erfauft ble GJer~e, ben .pafer,

" HA.SOUL~NE, FEMININE AND NEUTER PLURAL, &0.

. .

btn .lto~l .unb ben !IDei~en. 18. lIDet fauft ben !Ring, ben $lod. ba' (iijm, ben @lIar,! unb ba" !jla\lier! 19 . .pat bet .Rnabe elneu 9lblet, einen .pabid)t, elne (iu!e obet einen !Raben? 20. !nie !Jlad)tigaU jingt in ber !Jlad)t. 21. !ner ~~otn iil eln !IDa!bbaum. It"l" filt eln ~aum 1ft bie !IDeibe? 22. !IDa6 filr eln mogel iil bie ~erd)e? 23. !na" .Rinb ~al elnen Q{\lfel, eine ~irne, eine IDlanbel. elne IDlelone unb elne !jl~rfid)e. 24. l)et @robfd)mieb ~at elnen ~mbo" unb ber IDlaum ~at efne .Reae. -.

EXERCISE 35. ~.fgllbt 35.

1. The summer is warm, the winter is cold. 2. The spring IS pleasant, the autumn is unpleasant. 3. The glazier has a beautiful diamond. 4. The goldsmith has the gold, the silver, the emerald and the ruby. 5. Indolence is often the attendant of vanity. 6. The world-renowned Tiber is not a very large river. 7. The swan is white, the goose gray or white. 8. The squirrel lives in the woods, the hare in the field and the cat in the house. 9. No good man loves hypocrisy. 10. This girl has a new ribbon, and this boy has the first volume of your new work. 11. What large city lies on the Danube Y 12. What does the Arab call the camel l 13. In what country do the rhinoceros, the hippopotamus, the tiger, the lion, the crocodile, the ostrich, the hyena and the elephant live! 14. Have you the bread, the cheese, the meat, the wheat and the barley! 15. No, I have the salt, the pepper, the mustard, the vinegar, the beer, the wine, the oil, the coffee, the tea, the sugar and the' flour. 16. Has the man the glass, the gold, the iron, the steel, the leather, the paper, the pen, the pencil, the ink and the knife! 17. The old peasant has a large field, a large garden and a large house. 18. The miller buys the wheat and the rye, the brewer buys the barley, and the merchant buys the oats. 19. Have you the desk, the table, the sofa, the stove, the tongs, the shovel, and the chair of the cabinet-maker? 20. What kind of a bird is the eagle, and what kind of a beast is the wolf? 21. Are you writing with my pen or with your pencil? 22. Which fish does the girl buy, the trout, the salmon or the eel! 23. Which mechanic has an anvil and a hammer, and which has a chisel! 24. In what kind of a country do the duck, the swan, the goose, the beaver, the chamois, the rabbit, the reindeer, the bear, the wolf and the fox live 1 25. Have you an apple, a peach or a pear

-for this little child 1 26. Are you learning a foreign language!

LESSON XX.

'6ectin XX

IIUSCULINE, FBMININE AND NEUTER PLURAL

1. In the plural, the words contained in Lists L. 8. 3., and 9.5., as also me~tete, several; have but one form for all genders: namely, aUe, 'ole, biefe, einige, etlicl)e, jebe, [ene, mand)e, fold)e, and Itle{d)e; belne, rum or enre, i~te, 3'~te, meint,fdnt, unfrre and fcine. These have all the same inflection.

ADJECTIVES, AND NCUNS, IN THB PL1JR.lL, &0. "

»E.:J, UJ' ART. DDf. INTJ:BBOG. AD POSS. PIlON • .um mDICJ'. lroJf.

Nom. 'Dit j \liefe j Illelct;e j mdne j Qat j ftine j

.Gen. \ltT j \lfrftT j l1Ield)tT j melnn j aan j fdntt j

Dat. \len j 'Diefm j Illrlct;rn j mrinm j aaen; ftlnm;

Au. \lie; \liefe; wdct;e; mtlne; aae; ftine.

ADJECTIVES IN THE PLURAL.

2. In the plural, adjectives have but one form for all genders, and are inflected according to the old and netD declensions.

3. When not preceded by one of the words in the above list (see 1.), the. adjective is inflected like 'Diefe, and is of the

Nom. gute, good;

Gen. guttT, of good; Dat. guten, to, for good; Ace. gute, good;

OLD DICCLICNSIOII'.

alie, old ].

alttT, of old ; alien, to, for old; aUe, old;

(biefe) ; ~ieftt) j ('Diefm) ; (\liefe).

4. of:) a 1i en, f e in AND 10 lien, PRESENT PLURAL.

Illfr t,a1ien, we have; lllirjin'D, we are; Illirlo&en, we praise, i~r* ~a&t, you have; i~r fel'o, you are; i~r lo&t, you praise; jic* ~a1ien, they have; jie fln'D, they are; fle1o&en, they praise.

NOUNS OF THE OLD DECLENSION PLURAL.

5. Masculine and neuter nouns ending in t, el, en, er, ct;cn and Ieln, have the same form in the plural as in the singular; as,

'oa" WlitteI, the means; bie IDlltteI, the means;

'oal8 @e&liu'De, the building; 'Die @e{1Qu'De, the buildings;

'DtT IDlorgen, the morni~g;. \lie IDlofgen, the mornings, &c.

E:r:eeptitnU : the following IlllU01di"" nouns lake in the plural tbe Umlaut; SX!'fef, ~ammd • .pClllbd, \mangel, IDlantel, !l1abtl, !l1agel, eClttel, ~d}nabe!. illogel, iJabell r. @Jarten. @Jraben, .pafen, Cfrn. ~d.laben, ~d'er, I8mber, .pammer, ed}lI.Inger. inater, (and the ..... ter) Jtlojler.

The feminine nouns IDlutttT and ~oct;ter also take the Umlaut.

6. Masculine and neuter nouns of other terminations add e, and the masculine+ ~sSUIlUl the Umlaut, if capable of it; as,

*> For remark. on the UBe of ibr and fie, see I •. 24. II.

t) In thls manner are declined also the following feminine nouns : SXugll. 9luij. ~udlt. SXrt. \Bnttf. !Drnb!, \Brull, lJaull. lJrud}t. @Jnul. @ruft. @Jefd)llluljt .• fjanb • .pallt • .!fluft •. Ihaft • .!tub • .!tulIll. ~au4. ~uft. ~ull. IDlndlt, IDlallb. illlnll4, \J1adlt, 9l.1bt. 9bItb, !l1u9, enu, ed}nllf, etabt, !lIlallb, !lIldt, !lIlurjl, Sunft, Sufam. mmhlllft.

._

48 NOUNS OF THE OLD DECLENSION PLURAL, .".

,

ber l8aum, the tree; bit l8lhune, the trees; bet 9lolf, the coat; bit 9lOlfe, the coats.

Eo:uptiofu: the following add e ~ in the plural and take the Umlaut, ifcapable otlt II. N6Vtef': ~a', 9hnt, !Bab, lBilb, !Blatt, lBud), !i)ad), ~o~f, (Ji, !tad), Wa;, ijtlb, @elb, @emiitb, @eflflled)t, @efl'enjl, @Id, @(ieb, @~a&, @~a', @ut, .£jIlUI't, .£jau" .£jorl'ita'l, .£jugn, .!tal&, .!tamifo'l, Jtinb, .fleib, .!torn, Jt~aut, ~amm, ~ieb, ~od), !lJlaul, !l1ejl, Illarlament, Illfanb, !Rab, !Reaiment'. !Rei .. !Rinb, ed)lojj, ~d)llIert, $I'ita'!, ~~al, !nol', lllleib; and

6 • .M .... "u ... : 186felllid)t, ~oru, @eijl, @ott, ~ei&, !lnann,· ,oft, !Raub, lllot. muub, llllalb, llllurm:

The following flUJ8culi .. u do not 88BWIlO the Umlaut;

e, ¥lal, 91ar, 91&enb, 11mbojj, ¥lnlllalr, ¥lrm, ~od)t, !l)old), ~o~fd), (Jiba"" @rmab{', @rab, .£jabid)t, .£jalm, .~aud), .£jerlOIJ, .£juf, .£jUnb, .fal'auu, .!to. 60lb, .!torf, .!tral1id), ~aut, ~eldlnam, ~ud)8, !lnold), !J)}"onat, IDlonb, !J)lorb, Illf.lb, Illrol'f, Illul', Illunft, ~alm, ~dlaft, ed}u~, ~taar, etoff, ~aa. ~runfenbolb, l!lirlfrap. Un~olb, lllliebe~o"f.

7. Some nouns have two (and one word, l8antl, has three) forms in the plural; as,

!Baub, !Banbef, n. ribbons; !Baube, m. bonds; !Banbe, m. volmnes;

!Banf,j. !BAnfe, benches; . !Banfen, banks;

!Bogen, m. !Bogen, sheets of paper; !Bogen, bows, arches;

9Jlonb, m. IDlonbe, planets; IDlonben, months ;

!)tt, m. . Dde, places j .oeder, places, villages, &c.

Sd)llb, @id)ilbe, m. shields; Sd}ilber, n. sign-boards;

8. The nom., gen. and aco. are alike, and the dat. adds n.

EXERCISE 86. J\a',Clh 86 •

... @ie~cn Sle fdjone !Bdnme aUf [enen .Qligeln Y 2. 3d) fr~e metier .£jligel nod) !Bdumt. 3. @eben @iie ben ®dmeibetn bie !Ring~ bet @id1mlebc Y 4. mer !Bauer ~at einen !IBagen, Amei !I.lflligt, brei !I.lfeY.c, amolf @immelne nnb lIeunaig (L. 51.) @id)afe. 5. mie @io~ne ber ~e~m ~a&cn bit IDleiTer ber 3dger. 6. mie Xifd)lef ~aben gute .£jobel unb fd)arfe IDlel;el. 7. ~ic. gen 3~re !Blei~ifte aUf ben :tifd)en 'ber @id)liler ¥ 8. !nein, ble @id)iller Iegen ble !Blei~ifte allf ble @itli~le. 9. mie !lIlllfd)tlfdJe nnb !pulte in bic. fen 31mnmn ge~oren ben ~ifdJlern. 10. 3ene .!tojfer unb .ltbrbe ge~o. ren ben !Brauern. 11. !IBM letnen faule unaufmerffame @;d)illetY 12. !IDa" flir ~dume ~abrn bide @itdmme? 13. mlefe \Jdd)te jinb nid)t te!f. 14. mle !nlilfe au] bi~fen !Baumen jinb bitter. 16. mlefe @dnfe

. jillb grau nnb jene jinb Itlei;. 16. mie IDlittter ~aben ~arte, Ullb bie Xod)ter meld)e .£jdnbe. 17. 3d) ~abe me~tett ~erte. 18. ~iefe !Banfe jinb 3u ~od). 19. !lJleine \Jreunbe mO~lIe'l In gro;en @itabtcn. 20. @ilnb bicfe IDlanner .!taufleute ober 3immedute ¥ 21. Unfert ~eibtr jinb ~erlllid) unb unfete @elfler lIn~erblid). 22. mie morf~r jilib nimt In ben !lIldlbefll. 23. @iinb bie ~dmmet aUf ben \JeIbetn? 24. miefe IDldnner

• In the plural of many compound word .. '!l>lann takeltbe plural ~eute; as, .fluf' leute, merchants; Simlmrlelltt, carpenter •.

ADJBCTIVES OF TBII NBW DBCLENSION. ",

finb feine !8ojeroid)ter. 25. !Olere .ltinber jinb btel 31lljte alt. 26. !Ole .punbe finb tteue X~im. 27. !Oicre ~dlll~e finb Ilon stcbem 2e.bet. 28. ~in 31lljr ~at 3\l1olf !Iltonate ot>et btel ~ullbert funf unb femals Xatlf unb ein Xag ~at Illet unb aroanaig ~Iunben. 29. !Olefe mJagnet ~a&en f mone mJagen. SO. !Olefe !filiirme1' fcmmen auil bet <itbe. 3]. !Ole to. mifmtn ®ffd1Id)ljd)telbet f\lted)en Illelllcn ben <Mollern ullb <Motlinnen.

32. !Ole !8dume in ben !lil.ilbern Ilon !Oeutrd1lanb filtb nlmt fe~r ore,"

33. !pjerbe ~aben runbe .pufe. 34. ~bler, ~taarr ullb !lilkbe~o"fe finb !lliioeL

EXERCISE 37. ,..,s.be 37.

1. The trees on these hills are very small. 2. These smiths have the coats of those tailors. 3. The goldsmiths have beautiful rings. 4. These four pencils belong to those two scholars. 5. Have the brewers the plows of the smiths Y 6. Have the cabinet-makers your tables or your wash-stands Y 7. Have you fine horses Y 8. No, but I have fine sheep. 9. Whose friends are skillful artists Y 10. The benches in these rooms are not very high. ·11. Have the sons of the teachers large trunks? 12. They have no trunks at all, they have large baskets. 13. Have the millers planes and chisels ¥ 14. What kind of plows have the smiths ¥ 15. Are these geese very old ¥ 16. Who has large hands ¥ 17. To whom do these axes belong? 18. Who lives in large cities ¥ 19. This man has cows and sheep but he has no geese. 20. What kind of scholars learn nothing Y 21. Do you learn much Y 22. Do the lambs live in the forests Y 23. Have these men good books? 24. No, they have good pencils. 25. These dogs are four years old. 26. These worms live in the earth. 27. Have these men good ahoes V 28. They have the wagons of the wagon-makers. 29. A month has thirty days and a year twelve months. 30. These men have strong arms and heavy daggers. 31. Which men speak of their. godsY 32. These forests are large but the trees are small. 33. Eag:at are large, and starlings are small birds.

LESSON XXI.

It,clio R XXI.

ADJECTIVES OF THE NEW DECLENSION PLURAL.

1. Adjectives when preceded by a word in List L. 20. 1.· end in all cases of the ~l in en, and are of the

N~W DECLENSION.

Nom. bie reif-m, the ripe j . melne teif-en, my ripe j Gen. bet teif-en, of the ripe j meiner teif-en, of my ripe; Dat. 'om teif-m, to the ripe j meinen teif-en, to my ripe ;

Ace. bie teif-en, the ripe; mrine teif-en, my ripe.

-

. ~) By many writ ... Ihe nnm. and ace. plu ofRdjeclive. preceded by aUe, rinl~t,

ftlubf, mandie, mebre, foldle, rodellt, are inflected according to Ihe old, and the other e •• e. according to Ihe lIew declension ; as, aUe gutt IDlrnfd)m; ff bIt elatBf QUlf jJmlnbr: tbWl forming In the plural a ,"i~ed declensron,

... .

NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION.

NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION.

2. Nouns ofthe New Declension have all cases oftha phsrallike the oblique cases of the singular (L. 16. 5).

3. In the plural, most feminine nouns (L. 20. Note), are inflected according to the New Declension. Those ending with the suffix in, double the n in the plural; as, Jtoniein, queen; Jtoni9innen, queens.

INFLECTION OF NOUNS AFTER THE NEW DECLENSION PLURll.

Nom. Jtnalie-n; 9la'Del-n ; ~lit-en ; iiteunbin-nen j

Gen. Jtnabe-n; 9labeI-n ; ~lit-en; ijteunbin-nen j

Dat. Jtna6e-n; 9labeI-n; - ~lit-en ; ffteunbfn-nen j

Ace. Jtna6e-n; 9labeI-n ; ~iit-en; iiteun'Din-nen. 4

4. The following masculine nouns are inflected according to the new Declension, and also take B after the en of the genitive singular: ijeIB, ijtie'De, ijunfc, @ebanfe, ®Iau6e, .paufe, 9lame, Same, Sd}abe, ~udijlalie, !!Stae. Thus, nom. ijeIB, gen. ije1fenlJ, dat. 'Dem ijelfen, &c., plur. nom. 'Dieijelfen, gen. bet ijelfen, &c.

These nouns, however, often end In the nominative singular In en, and are then regularly inflected according to the Old Declension; as, Nom. 'Det ije1frn, gen. be6 ij'elfenB, &c.

met Sd]mer; forms the genitive, and balJ .pera the genitive and dative singular, in the same way, and follow the new declension in the plural.

5. The following masculine nouns are inflected, in the singular, according to the old, and in the plural according to the new declension: ~~n, ~auet, mOtll, ijUttet, tYOtjl, @au, @el)at. t}t, ~otlieer, IDlajl, !nad]liaT, Wfau, See, SVOtll, Stad}eI, Stta~r, fStraufj, !Dettet, Untett~an, Bimat~; also the neuter nouns,

~uBe, ~ett, (fu'oe, .pemb, O~T. l

~ett and .pem'o have also the forms, ~ette and .pentbet. Foreign masculine nouns ending In unaccented OT, and a • few others, are also inflected in the singalar according to the

old, and in the plural according to the new declension; as, nom. 'oet WtofeffoT, gen. 'DeB WTofeffotB, &c. ; nom. p11l. bie Wro. feffoTen, &c.

Some add fen in the plural; as, 'DaB lll'obetli; plu. bie ~.

bet6ien, &c. .

DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS.

6; Proper names of persons generally take. in the gem. live; as,

e pl. Nom. 4ltinrilf1, Henry; Gen . .ptinricf,', Henry's;

Nom. ~trttub, Gertrude; Gen. @trttu'o'il, Gertrude's.

, art 7. Feminine nouns ending in e, follow Ute new declension

lI"itI: (1.16: 5), and add also G in the genitive j as,

eai Nom. ~atlotte, Charlotte; Gen. ~atlottenG, Charlotte's.

I 8. MlUeuline nouns ending in a letter where euphony will

L I DQt admit of an additional G, add enG j as,

Nom. 2ei\nli, Leibnitz j Gen. 2e1bnlienD, Leibnitz's.

9. Foreign proper namea" which do not admit of the addition of 0, generally indicate the case by means of the defi-

nite article; as, -

. N. !)emo~e', Demosthenes; G. be. !I)emo~mee, ofDemosthenes.

EXERCJ8E 38. Jafs.be 38. •

1. l{)ie jMam Wiirjlm uub lIrafm untftbrillftn ble Cltllten ~auem. ~. !I)le Cltlltm @lolbClten ~Cl&m bit mcgem .od)fen uUfner guten !Jllld)bam. 3. !DIe jlel,lgen JtnCl&en ge~en In ble gutm E5d)ulm unb bie iJel,lgen !Bie, • fud)m bie bufttnben !Blmnen. 4. mie tCll'fnm Ungarn ~Cl!Ten bit libmnitlJlgm !Jtu!Ten. 5. !I)le neuen jtClnaeln In blefen gro'en Jtird)m jinb fe~t fdJon. 6. !I)le jungm Wteunblnnm melnn guten 1S~l1leflern ~Clben melne nifen ~ltnen. 7. !DIe armen !Jl(4)bCltlnnm unfmt guten IjreullJl binnm ~Cl&en telft !p~Clumen. 8. mle flreltfud)tlgen Ijran~ofen jinb ble !Jlad)liClm bet ftleblld)en !I)eutfd)en. 9. !DIe ~ol1len unb ~dftn jinb !Jl(\ub. t~iete. 10. mle @ne4)en jinb felne guten Ijreunbe ber flolaen !turfen. 11. !WeInofen unb @lolbClten fitljren etn unjid)ette uub Mjlnngenbrt! \!e' ~en. Ill. !I)ie @l4)tlften bet alten @ried)en jinb fe~t fd)on. 13. !!neine fleinen !8tiibn tefm ble !Jlebm be' l\!eUberii~mten ~i,eto.

tIEIWISES OF NOUNS AFTER THE NEW DECLENIION. 49

E:URCIIE 39.

~af9.h 39.

1. Are the young counts the neighbors of the old princes"

2. Have ,our young friends the ripe pears and the beautiful flowers 0 our good neighbors Y 3. Are the valiant Hungarians \he good neighbors of the peaceful Germans 1 4. Are the soldiers and sailors Russians, Frenchmen or Danes ~ 5. The soldiers are Russians and the sailors are Greeks. ·6. The good sailors on this ship are Danes; the Danes 'are good sailors. 7. The large old churches of the Germans are very beautiful. 8. The good boys have the beautiful flowers. 9. Our poor neighbors have our ripe Vlums and pears. 10. The large pulpits in our new churches are not beautiful. 11. We read the beautiful writings and speeches of the ancient Greeks. 12. The giants of the old times were grea.~ heroes. 13. My young friends are reading old legends .

• ) Those that mlly take 8, sometimes omit it, and are preceded by the article i .. ~re {lillffO, iootead of fiiimo·8.

. 8

60 CONNECTED VIEW OF THE ARTICLE, DEIIlONITRATIYll IiJIID

10. CONNECTED VIEW OF THE ARTICLE DEIIlONr.I"· DECLENSIONS, sIl'f-

Sin_gular.

oMlUlt. Fem. Neut. .M ... e, Fe... ~t. M ... e Felli. NfIfII.

N. 'Dfr, 'DIe, 'DaIS; biefer, biefe, blefee; mein, meine, mein; G. 'De~, ber, 'Dee; biefee, biefer, ~iefee; melnes, meiner, meinte; D. bem, ber, 'oem; bief., biefer,biefem; meinem, meiner,meinem;' A. 'Den, 'Die, bae; bieren, biefe, bfeiee; meinen, melne, mein.·

OLD DECLENSION OF THE AD1ECTI'VE AND NOUN •

.lI!""t. Fem. Neut. Mue. .MlUlt. Nsvt. Neut.

N. guter: gute, gutee; muter; 9Jlann; ~acl}; 9JlitteI;

G. gutee (etY,guter, gitte, (en); matere; 9JlanneB; ~1lcl}eB; 9Jlittd4j

D. gutern, I guter, gutem; mater; 9Jlanne; ~acl}e; 9JlitteI;

A. guten, gute, gutee; mater; 9Jlllnn; ~acl}; 9Jlittd.·

NEW DECLENSION OF THE AD1ECTIVE AND NOUN •

MUI'" Fem. Neut. .M ..... MIU ..
·N. ber gute, bie gute, baB gute; ~m; @raf; •
G. be4 guten, ber guten, beB guten; ~erm; @rllfen;
D. nem guten, ber guten, ·bem guten ; .perm; @rllfen;
A. ben gute'l, bie gute, baG gute; .perm; @rafen. • .MaSt.

N. mein guter, ·G. melnee Buten, D. memem guten, A. meinen guten,

1I4IXEQ DEOLENSION OF THE AD1ECTIVE.

Fem. N.Kl.

meine gute, mein guteB;

metner guten, melnes guten; meiner guten, melnem guten;

melne gute, mein guteB.

EXAMPLES OF THE VARIOUS DECLENSIONS IN THE SINGULAR.

Good steel. "he color of good steel. With good steel. The good smith has good steel. Old iron. The color of old iron.

With old iron. The little child has old iron. .

All good steel and all good iron; The price of the good steel and the good iron. With that good steel and this good, iron. That good smith has the good steel and the good iron.

My good steel and your good iron. The price of my good steel and your good iron. With his young horse and my old w&g!lII. My good friend has your old horse and my new wagon. ';l'he nephew of the soldier is going with the sailor. Why do you praise the sailor's nephew 1 The" nephew of his uncle" is a great iyrant, but is he a great man ~ The emperor, the king and the duke have the peasant's money. The proud prince is the wicked oppressor of his suffering people.

/

/

I'OIIIEUtTE PRONOUNS ADJECT1TES AND NOUNS, .C. 61

AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUN, ADJECTIVE AND NOUN, IN ALL GUUl! AND PLURAL,

Plural.

j

AU thadr. •.
bit; biefe; mdne; -' -' -' -; -' -;
, , , ,
kr; bfefer; meiner; -i' -' -' -; -; -;
, ,
ben; bfefen; mtinm; -; -; -;; -; -; -i
bit; bftfe; meint; -; -j -' -; -; -.
, OLD DECLUSIOX or THE ADJECTIVE AND Non,

.411 a.... .Nut:. AI_. A.. A& Nftft. NtWl.

Bute; !Dater; IDlllnner;, .paitbe ; IDliitter; !I>1td1er; IDlltte[ ; suter; !Dllter; IDlllnner; ~nbt ; IDliltter; !I>ad1er; 9Jlfttel ; sutm; !Datmt; IDlcinnmt: .plln'oen; IDliittern ; !I>cid1mt ; IDlittdn; sutt; '!DlUer; IDlcinntr; .plln'oe; 9Jb'itter; !I>ad1er; IDlittel,

_w DECLUBJON or THE ADnICTIVJ: AND Non.

AU Gftkr.. AI__ A& All. Nevi..

bie Quten; melne Quten; @rafm; ijt'omt; ~afern; • .per;m; ber guten; mtfner guten.; @rafen; ije'oern; ~afeIn; .peraen; 'om guten ; mtfnen guten ; @fafen; ije'oern; ~ afdn; .per3en; bie guten; metne gutm; ®rafm; tle'omt; ~afdn; .pCfam.

EXAMl'LES OF THE VARIOUS DECLENSIONS IN THE PLURAL.

Industrious mechanics have hard hands. The arms of the industrious laborers are strong; Wicked princes write unjust laws' with the sharp swords of bad and ignorant men. He writes with new pens, I with old ones. Do good princes oppress their poor subjects 1 Who are good princes 1 Are all pnnces, emperors, kings and dukes oppressors? Good men are never oppressors of the 'poor. the wea~or the ignorant, Good. citizens are also good soldiers in all jus~wars. This beautiful green field and those fine houses be3ng to the old enemies "af our poor neighbors. These old men are the fathers and uncles of our young friends. The daughters of these old ladies are our good friends. The scholars of your sisters are my cousins.. The new benches, chairs and tables in these schools are not good. These little girls are very diligent and attentive scholars. Idle men are neither great men nor good men; my young friends, do you forget it 1 Do you see those little birds on the steep roofs of those large houses behind the tall trees 1 All really good 'men are industrious men. Really good men are never indolent men. Are all good soldiers also good citizens 1 The soldiers have the fat oxen of the poor peasants. Weare a fortunate people, for we have :leither emperors,

kings, dukes nor noblemen in our country. l -

,62

COMPARISON OP AD1ECTIYE8.

LESSON XXII.

Itctin XXII.

COMPARISON OF AD1ECTIVES.

1. The comparative is formed by suffixing t* or et; and the superlative, by suffixing fl or efl*, to the positive; as,

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.

milo, mild; mllbet, milder; mllbejl,mlldest;

",rift, wise; \\!tifet, wiser; l1lelfejl, wisest~

fmon, beautiful; fd)ollet, more beautiful; fd)onjl, most beautiful,

Iaut, loud; lauter, louder; {antejl, loudest.

2. When the positive is a monosyllable, the root vowels a, 0, u, generally assume the Umlaut; as,

alt, old; IiUet, older; Mtejl, oldest;

{lroli, coarse; gtoliet, coarser; grolijl, coarsest;

flug, prudent; Ui'1get, more prudent; Ui'1gtl, most prudent.

Euoption.: bunt, f4Ib, fa~1, fobe, ~D~{, ~oIb, f«l}l, felfli, In""lI, [a~m, {ali. matt. morfd). I"att. ll(uml'. tafdl. tO~. funb, fadlt. fatt, fdllClff, fdllanr, fd)rolf, jlm, 1101&. finif. flumm. jluml'f. tDU, \lOU, II!CI~t, la~m.

With regard to the following adjectives usage varies; some authors writing them with, 'Others without the Umlaut: bang, llarfd), llfanf, llIa~, llIo~, llrab, 'ount.llf, falfcf1, f(ad1, ftof1, ftomm,

gcfun'o, glatt, flat, lofe, nalft, naj, aan. .

3. The following are irregular:

gro~. large; gtopet, larger; grapt, largest;

gut, good j . bejfet, better; bejl, best;

~om, high; ~o~et, higher; ~od)jl, highest;

naI)e, near; n~et, nearer; ulid)jl, nearest;

~iel, much,many; me~t,t more; meljl(orme~tjl),most.

4. The uninflected form of the comparative is used only

predicatively; as,,, , "-

(it Ijl teld}, alier Ilfl liln nod) reld)er. He is rich but I am still richer. 6. When the superlative is used predicatively, it usually stands in the dative after am (see L. 16. 4.); as,

Cir Ijl am tellfljlen. He is the richest. Literally; he is at the richest. ,j 6. ~n used atiributively the comparative and superlative ~ are subjeh to the same rules of declension as the positive; as,

.. When !be poaitive enda in e, tbe ..... "....mll. add. only f; III, mdbt, we ary; milber, more ~eary. When the poaitive end. in b, " ~, fd), t, or .. !be ...,.nat;". adell eft; 88, nnlb. mild; milber, mildar; milbejt. mildest.

t ilJle~r i. often rendered "longer"; III, er Ijl nldlt me~r ~Ier; be ia DO longer (not more) here: Id) ~abe fein Qlelb me~r, I have DO 10", .IY money, (td) ~Clbt .,ct. me~r Qlelb·; I have 110 more DIODey).

uuolSa ON TS. OOIU'UJ80N 01' ADIBOTIYU. U

CIfn ~ft'mt .oat. A better hat.

!lln bejfm IBetu. The better wine.

!Dlrin t~tt Wrnmo. My dearest friend.

!llet tl]ellerile WtelUlb. The dearest friend.

7. The superlative is often BUfJixed to the genitive pIn of aU; as,

o mieftt.out III bet aUetflfJ~njle. This hat is the finest of all.

8. When two qualities of the same object are compared, &he word me~ before the unchanged form of the positive is

employed j as, -

lit ijl me~t tll\lfet aU aug. He is more brave than prudent.

9. 3e-:.beflo (sometimes bqto- je), or it-it, with the comparative of adjectives, answers to "the-the", in the like con-

struction in English; as, ....

3e Qt~;et bejlo &eft'tt. The larger the better.

3e me~t je 1II1IlI;fertt. The more the merrier.

10. After brtlo, the position of the verb and ita subject 18 reversed; as,

~e jlel.iget ee Ijl, bejlo flll.eUn lmat The more diligent he is, 1be

et (instead of et ltmt). fastar he learns (learns he).

EXERCISB 40. .;a.r8dt 40.

1. 31l bie (fid)e rin lIillld)nn maum aU ble Xmme' So 311 nldlt bal! (L. 46.) (flfm eln ni,Ud!m' !lRdaU aU ba' Qlolb' 8. 45t~111l ~nrtet aU (iifm, \1)ddle' III ba. ~drtejie HIldaU' 4._ meldlf' III baG ~nrtefte .oo~ Y 6. !!Be[dlel! ba' \1)eld)lIe' 6. meIdle. III ba. glllcflidlile 1!anb Y '7. !iDdd)e' ba. U1Ijllicflld)jle? 8. lIDeld)e 9latlon ~t bit fd)6njie ES\ltad)e nnb \1)debe ble ~d1illd)fte , 9. !!Beld)e bie ltid)tejle nnb tDelebe ble fd)\1!etfte' 10. 'lS0 Itl bie hft QtI\ fdIteftm ~b \1)0 am \1)dnnfteu' 11. !BtflfJet lji bet Qt~jte IUIb \1)eI!l1et bet fIeinjie mogelY 1~. IIDtt 1ft fteige&~gtt all! bie f d)\1)eblf d)e !JladltlgaU ? 13. lIDtt Ijl eln Qt6jntt QJeijl aU bet ietlge <5taat'feaetdr bet mmlnlgtm EStaattn Y 14. meIdle. 2a1lb ~at bit flf1l1eUjlm nub &tjlen"<5d)ilfe unb maml'fboote , 16. lIDtld)e~1l bie htU "ufga&e In bltfem mu"'e' 16. lIDo~nt 3l1r Wreunb nld)tme~t ~Itt' 1 '7. 3e me~r id) "etblene, bello ~r gebe tlfJ ben!lrn&eu. 18. 11Beld!e 1ft bie angene~jte 3~1t?

EXERCISE 41. / ~'f8dt 41.

1. Which is the. largest animal, and which is the mOlt Ul8ful'

I. Which is the most patient' 3. Is the hardest metal also the most ulieM Y 4. fn what country do we find the largest trees' '6. Is the winter a more pleasant season of the year than the autumn Y 6. Why is the summer more pleasant than the springY 7 In what country are the camel and the elephant more useful than ' the horse? 8. Do you find this language more difficult than that' i. Why is the oak more useful than the pine 'I 10. Which is the r,chAat nation in tile world 'I 11. Is the lily more beaut.i1'ul than

M ADJECTIVEI UIED IUBITANTIVBLY AND .&DVEaBaLLY. the pink Y 12. Which is the larf.,st of the United States, and which is the richest 1 13. A:te the ricnest men also the most generous 1 14. Have you a better knife than this? 15. Is this a. better hat than that"? 16. Why is the most indastrious man the happiest Y 17. Why are we less happy than our neighbors'

LESSON XXIII.

&tttin XXIII.

ADJECTIVES U"ED SUBSTANTIVELY AND ADVERBIALLY.

1. The adjective is used substantively, and is then writtt>D . with a capital initial: -

a. to express a quality taken in the abstract j as,

mom <itijabenen aum 2acl)edicl)en Ijl From the sublime to the ridi-

nut eln @id)titt. oulous is but a step.

<i~ 111 lijm eln eeid)te'. It is an easy thing for him.

<i. ill flit ba~ allgemeine ~ejle. It is for the general good (best).

!IDilien @iie baf !Jldijm I)on bet Do you know the particulars

@iad)e Y (nearer details) of the affair Y

b. when it refers to persons; as,

ll>et @lute 111 glAtflid), bet ~ofe Ijl The good (man) is happy, the

denbo bad (man) is miserable.

ll>ie @luten flnb gli'ttfIld), bie ~ofen The good are happy, the bad are

flnb denbo miserable.

21ebe beinen !Jlad)flen tIlle bid) femfl. Love thy neighbor as thyself. ,,!Jlid)t flitd)tet bet @id)tIlad)e, bet The feeble (man),. the peaceful

Wtieblid)e meijt, be. IDldd)tigen (man) is no longer afraid of be-

~eute au tIlerben." coming the llrey of the strong.

ll>iefet ll>eutfd)e Ijl eln @leltijrier. This German IS a learned (man).

ll>iefet (Meijrie ijl ein ll>eutfd)et. This learned (man) is a German. -

3ene Sell one Ijl feijt flolA. That fair one is very proud.

(iluten IDlotgen, meln ,t(einet. Good morning, my little fellow.

<it bemetft tIlle ble @lroUenben He perceives how the grumblen

(L.27. Ob".) ili'tflem. (grumbling ones) whisper.

"* _ 2. The adjective sometimes rejects the inflectional endings :)'"in the nominative and accusative neuter; as,

.taU (for faIte~) !IDaliet. !Ilt (for aIte.) <iifen. 4Sein untll~

(for untllurbige.) matetlanb. .:.

8. When several adjectives qualify the same noun, the t inflectional endings of all but the last, are sometimes dropped, and the omission marked by a hyphen; as,

ll>ie fd)ltlaq.rotij.golbene Waijne. The black red golden banner.

4. The last syllable of compound, or derivative adjectives, is in like manner sometimes omitted; as,

!Jliemqnb Itlar fo fteuben. nnb fi)laf. Noone was as 10, less and aleepoo

10. ",I. Ct. less as he.

ADJEOTIVES USED SUBBTAN'TIVELY AND ADVERBIALLY. 66

6. When several adjectives precede a noun in the dative masculine or neuter, the first one frequently takes the old,

and the others the new declension; as, .

mad) Iangem l!erbe~&lid1en <6tnlt. Instead of, mad) Iangem lletbet6, lid, e m <6tteit. After long destructive strife.

6. Adjectives in all degrees of comparison (in the form in which they occur as predicate) are employed adverbially; as, <6ie fd,relben fd)Ied)t, er fcf)rei6t You write badly, he writes

fd,led,ter, u;.b Id, fd)rellie am worse, and I write the worst.

fdJled)tejlen.

3d) ~abe efn gana neue~ .eaull. I have an entirely new house.

7. The superlative preceded by aufG or aUnt, is also used adverbially; as,

(it &eleibigte I~n auf~ @raufamjle. He insulted him most cruelly.

8. The adjectives titel and lautet, are sometimes placed without inflection before nouns, in the signification of "all",

"nothing but"; as, .

SDit jiolaen !nenf4)enfinbcr ~nb tlte! We proud sons of men are no-

ame <6itnbet. thing but poor sinners.

6ie ljilauter 2elien. She is all life.

9. Adjectives are formed from names of material by sta. fixing to nouns n, en or etU; and if capable of it, the radical vowel often assumes the Umlaut; as,

Icbmt, leathem, from 2eberj golben, golden, from @oIb. lln~(em, steel, from <6ta~l j ~iilaem, wooden, from .eola. clause or sentence is sometimes used adjectively j as, I)etseffenbe <6!l)la4)t Iiel The never to-be-forgotten battle

near (by) Leipsic.

Ijl efn In SDorten· au~ge. A sentence is a thought u-

btli.et @eballfe. pressed in words.

Literally, an In-words-expressed thought. -

11. An Adjective preceded by the article, is sometimes placed after the noun which it qualifies ; as,

oUft blefen .!trieiJ, ben fitr4)ter. Thou shalt end this dreadful wat

en, enben. (this war, the dreadful).

t 2. Adjectives derived from the names of countries or I nations do not begin with a capital letter except when used substantively; as, !D~ beutfdle .eeer.

!DIe ftanaiififdle <6\lracf)e. (lin \>reujif4)er <6otbat. fit lJ)o~nt 1m :!8rrmlfd)en.

5)et t6lnlf4)e ~om.

The German army. The French language. A Prussian soldier.

He lives in (the territory of) Bremen.

The Cathedral of Cologne

66 AD.JEOTIVEs USED SUBSTANTIVE! Y AND ADVERBlALLY

18. Adjectives are also formed from names of persons by the suffix ifd), and generally written with a capital initial; as,

mle .Rantifd)e !P~ilofol'~le. The Kantian philosophy. '.

!Da~ ~iU~'fci)e .peet. Tilly's army (the Tillian army) ..

mie .fut~erifd)e .Ritd)e. The Lutheran Church.

14. Instead of the adjective in ifd), derived from names of places, the substantive form in er (undeclined) is generally used; as,

o !Die 1!ell'~lger ,Seltung. mer IDlagbe6urget mom.

!IDlr fa~en ben IDlagbebutget mom.

The Leipsic Gazette.

The Cathedral of Magdeb'!:f_g. . We saw the Cathedral of Mag-

deburg.

EXERCISE 42. ~'f8dt 42.

1. IDland)et 9teld)e 1ft nnauftleben unb folgUd) ungll"uf!ld1 j unb man' d)er !A:tme Itl ~uftlebm unb gliuflld). . 2. (iln Un~uftiebener, aber elne Un$ auftiebme ift nid)t glftcflld). 3. mer 9lacbldf~ge etfftUt nid)t feine lJJflid). ten, er ift baijer nid)t auftleben unb folg!ici) nlci)t gliufllcb. 4. met 9lei. bifci)e iji immer nnauftieben. 6. 3d) benelbe nhl1t ble 9teid)en, abet id! (Jebauere ble !ltmen. 6. mer @el~lge fft~rt eln elenbe~ 2e&en. 7. !Der mUnbe lji ungIftcfllcl)et nnb ijftlflofet al~ bet Xau(Je obet bet 2alime. 8. 9l1cl)t lebet @elel)rte lji eln !!Beifer unb nld)t ie~et iIDeife III tin lielelit. ter. 9. ~a~ !ptaftlfd)e unb 9lft~lidie III (JetTer al~ ba~ te3.djline. 10. !Diefe fd)onen .Rinber ~ngen fd)on. 11. mer mebiente biefe~ [ungen meutfd)en III ber metter elne~ alten @efanbten. 12.· 9llemanb Iii elenber unb tijli. tld)ter at8 bet 9leibifd)e. 13. mer WCeijige lernt fcl)neU, ber [am, 14. met IDlenfd) I:letlangt etji ba~ 9leue, fucl)et ba~ mit unermftbllcl)em WCeije. 15. (iin 9teidier ift oft tlrmet. 16. 3d) liabe elnen lebernen @i4)u~, elnen golbenen ~lelerne~ Xintenfaj.

EXERCISE 48. ~'f8"e Id.

•

1. A miser is always an envious man, and therefore an uSlhappy one. 2. Many a learned-man is not a wise 0DSl. 3. We pity the poor, but we do not envy the rich. 4. The practical is better I the agreeable and the beautiful. 5. He learns faster than .

~ 6. She is contented, and he is discontented, for she is industrio s, ~ and he is idle. 7. He learns slowly for he does not study industriously. 8. The· idle man leads a miserable life for he is always discontented and consequently unhappy. 9. Who is more foolish and more miserable than the miser '? 10. Do you write more letters than your brother ¥ 11. The lame man pities the deaf one. 12. The blind man is still more unfortunate .than the deaf one. 13. The industrious man is not often discontented.

14. Who learns slowly, and who learns rapidly Y 15. I have a gold ring, a steel chain and a wooden table.

PD8OJf.AL PJlONOVNS AliD TO llDLBXITB l'JLOBIOVIi fl~. 67

LESSON XXIV.

lectin XXIV.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS' A.ND THI: REFLEXIVE PRONOUN f I~.

1. The genitive of the German personal pronoUDB, unliko the possessive in English (see L. 9. 2), does not express the relation of property or posseesion, but simply answers to our objective with (and sometimes without) a preposition; as, ~ebmfe mefner (gen.). Think of me, or remember me (obj.). tit1 jinb met fed!t1 unb iijter nut There are six of you (of you six) and

Iller. (L. 49. 7.) only four of them.

DBCLBNSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

SIN8UL.UL

N. 1d1, I; bu, thou;

G. ~dntf*, of me; bdnet*, of thee;

D. mlf, to me; bif, to, for thee;

A. mid1, me j bid1, thee;

N. "'if, we; G. unfet, of us;

. D. unf, to, for us; A . .an!, US;

PLURAL.

i~f, you;

euer, of you; tud1, to, for you; tud], you;

8INGUL.UL Feminine.

1ft, she;

I~et, of her; i~, to, for her; 1ft, her;

• Jliuculine. if.'., he;

t;.. frinet*, of him ;

]J,·I~m, to him; -

,.,. i~n, him;

•

(Sie, you); (3~m, of you); (3~nm, to, for you); (Sit, you).

(Sit, you); (311m, of you); (~nm, to, for you); (Sit, you).

NeuUIr.

ef, it;

felnet, of it;

i~m, to, for it; t., it.

• '. •• PLUIU.L 01' ALL GENDB88.

it. 1ft, they; 1ft, they; 1ft, they;

I}. i~fet, of them; ~fet, of them; i~m, of them;

iii. iljnm, to them; i~nm, to, for them; i~nm, to, for them;

r. A. ife, them; 1ft, them; 1ft, them.

_ • The pronouns of the first and second persons are often ~ reflexively, and then answer to our compound personal

• pt&l'ouns; as,

• 3d) lotie mid!. I praise myself.

!>u [objl bl4!. Thou praisest thyself.

mllt [oben unt1. We praise burselves •

• IIIIIeId of meinrr, brinrf, feiller, tile fol"llUl mein, bein, fein are 8OmetimulllOlCl

8-. .

08 PERSO!iAL PRONOUNS AND THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUN flet.

8. The reflexive pronoun fldj (French se) has but one form for both numbers and all genders, and is only used in the dative and accusative cases; as,

met !!nann lobi fldj. The man 1:::es himself.

(it gib! fid) tlld !!n6~e. .He gives . elf much trouble.

mle \Jrau lob! fld). The woman praises herself.

ma~ .tInb lobt jid). .. The child praises itself.

mle @id)ftlet lobrn fldi. The scholars praise themselves.

4. Sid) is frequently employed where in English the objective of the personal pronoun is used; as,

(it ~at rein @elb bel fidl. He has no money with him.

@iie ~aben \Jteunbe -bel fid)· They have friends with them.

5. These pronouns are often used .n a reciprocal signification, instead of, or placed before the proper reciprocal

tinanbtr; as, •

mie .punbe bei~en lid) j or, ble .punbe The dogs are biting each other,

bei~en lid) einanber. (or, the dogs are biting one another).

mie ~d)ftlet loben lidj j or, bie @id)l'1I The scholars praise each other,

let loben flcl}.elnanbet. (or, the scholars praise one

another). .

lIDarum ~a~t i~t end) Y or, lDarum Why do you hate each other!

~aP! i~t eud) elnanbetY (or, why do you hate one .another I)

6. The pronoun of the second person singular is empl0:ted in.addressing the Supreme Being; in proverbial phrases, and in the serious and sublime styles of composition; as, •• mit, mein @olt, mit etgeb' IcIj miclj! To Thee, my God, to nee. I

resign myself!

mor aflen mlngen lDad)e libet bid), Above all things, watch ovfll

bali bu nle .bie innere .sutletlidjt thyself, that thou never lose

au bit felbet tlerlierjl ! . the inward confidence to ~:

self! .

7. The pronoun of the second person singular is also usei in addressing relatives, intimate friends and children; as alse

when speaking to servants and other dependents; as, _

1IDi1~ Ieruji bu In bet @idjule Y What do you learn at scho. Y

3o~ann, ~aji bu belne Vlrbei! get~an? John, have you done your wfrk'

8. The plural of the second person was formerly regarJ.ed as the most polite and respectful form of address, whetqer to • one person or more, and this is still the case among the peasantry in some parts of Germany. At present, however, It is applied to the same class of persons in the plural, that

PERSONAL l'RONOUNS AND TSIi REFLEXIVE PRONOUN n~. 6& !l)u is in the singular: it is likewise used in addressing religious assemblies. .3~t, addressed to a single individual, implies his inferiority of rank or position; as,

!Dal! glaubt I~t mldlld) Y fagte bet Do you really believe that Y aaid

.tOnig. the king.

9. The former use of the second person plural (see 8.) is still retained in the syllable I!\v. (contraction of I!\vtt, an obsolete orthography of euer) which is now construed only with titles, and is followed by a plural verb; as,

Gw. !lnajefldt finb lIlel ml~lger au Your Majesty is (are) muchwit-

ie!). 'tier than I. .

10. In addressing an inferior, the pronoun of the third person singular is sometimes used; as,

!lBal! miinfd)t <lr? What do you (does he) wish'

!lBo mo~nt Sle' Where do you (does she) live'

11. In ordinary intercourse the form of address to one person or more, is with the pronoun-of the thiid person plural, so that, when spoken, the context only can decide whether the second or the third person is meant. In writing, however, these pronouns ,"hen referring to the second person, are always written with a capital initial; as,

.()Ilben Sle 3~re miie!)erY Have you your books'

.()Illien fie I~re mfte!)et Y Have they their books ,

.pat lie I~re miidJer , Has she lier books ,

.plllien 3~re Wreunbe 3~te Webetn Y Have your friends your pens r

9lein, 3~re Wreunbe ~a.lien fie. No, your friends have th~m.

Obs, As the incorrect use of ~u, (~, and tt in address, would be regarded as rude, it is better for learners in addressing strangers, always to employ the personal pronoun Sit, and the possessive .3 ~ t.

12. Pronouns referring to neuter appellations of persons, generally follow the natural, instead of the grammatical, gender; as,

~al! eo~nd)en blefer !name III The little son of this lady is sick; fran!; Ie!) fiire!)te et (or eel mfrb I fear he will die.

tlerlien.

13. Pronouns representing inanimate objects, must be or the same gender as the nouns to which they refer: hence a pronoun of one gender must often be translated by one of another; as,

--

60 EXERCISE8 ON PER80NALPRONOUN8, .0.

~et .f)ut ift f4Jon, Clbe~ e t ift au The hat is handsome butit is to.

fleln. small.

. ~Ie IDlii~e Iii f4Jon, abet fie Iii au The cap is handsome but it is

flein. too small.

14. In referring to animals, and things, an adverb (formed fJOm an adverb and a preposition) is often employed instead of a preposition and a pronoun; as,

mu ~ali elnen f4Jainen :!BeuteL; ~aft You have a fine- purse, have you

mu @elb batln? (L.38. 6.) money in it? (therein Y)

15. The neuter pronoun eB, employed as a If. ammatical subject, may represent nouns of all genders, whether singular or plural. But the verb, in such case, agrees in number with the noun, and not, as in English, with the pronoun; as,

ci~ flnb unfm \Jreunbe, meI4Je mit It is (are) our friends whom we

fe~en. see.

!Blffen ~Ie, met e~ IllY Do you know who it is t

16. When the logical subject itself is a personal pronoun, e j comes after the verb; that is, the order of the words is exactly the reverse of the English; as,

3d) bhl ~. It is 1. <it 1ft e~. It is he.

tSinb ~Ie e~ Y Is it you 1 €Selb 3~t ell' Is it you'

!Blr flnb e~. Itis we. €Sie flnb e~. It is you.

17. t« III often stands as the grammatical subject before active verbs, and is used in a variety of phrases where the corresponding English word is omitted: it also frequently answers to one, so, or there; as,

(I~ ~eurt bet €Sturm, ell btCluft bCl~ The storm howls, the sea roars.

!IJleet. •

(I~ bra4Jte bet !BinI! ben @ld)Cln The wind brought the sound di-

gtab lion <Silben ~et. rectly from the south.

3d) melji e~, baji ee fommt. I know (it) that he is coming e .

<I~ Iii 9llemClnb ~Iet. There is nobody here.

CIt itl teid), ober f4Jeint e~ au [eln. He is rich, or seems to be so.

<It iii .stClufmClnn, Clbn 141 bin e~ He is Ca) merchant, but I am not

nld)t. one.

(III flnb amel lJlferbe 1m @Clrten. There are two horses in the gal-

den.

EXERCISE 44. ,.. f 9 d t 44.

I. !Bet lobt ben <lnfel? 2. met Glropllatet lobt I~n. 3. !Bet lobt bit @tojimutter Y 4. mie <lufelln lobt lie. 5 • .(jat bet !l.nautet ben :!Ball ? 6. !neln, bet :!Bottd)er ~at I~n. 7 . .(jat ba4 IDliibd)en ~ie :!8rujlnClbel Y 8. !neln, ble Xante ~at fie. 9. 4?at ble !pu~mad)eTin 3~reu neuen ·tiut Y 10. !Rein, bet .(jutmad)et ~at i~lI. 11. iIDM ~at ble €Sd)lIleliet 3~te'

61

Wmmbtf , 1~ Sie ~ ble Webet Ujfff I8tubm. 18. 8Dd ~Hn bl, @ld)lOejletn 3~m \jreunbe' 14. ele ~aben ble \jebem 3~m !Bribet. ]5. ~oben ele 3~re jJteunbe' 16. !ntln, Id} (obe tit nld}t. 17. ~oben @lie mid) , 18. !neln, Id} lobe ele nld)t. 19. 20ben ele 3~re !Britber' 90. !JlelJt, id) lobe fie nld)t. 21. @eben ele UM @tlb' 22. !nein, Id) gebe 3~nm !Brob. 23. @eben ele 3~ren \jreunben !Brob' 24. !neln, iii) gebe I~nen @db. . 21S. !IDa" fagejl bu mlr' 26. 3d} fage blr nlebt" 27. ®«" fd)enfen ele 3~ret !!Rutter' 28. 3d) fd)enfe i~r elnen [elbenen Q!elbbeuteL 29. ed}enfen eie 3~rem !Bruber etllla'" ao. !nein, Id) fd)mfe I~m nld}t.. 31, 3d) ge~e mit meiner ed)roefter au Ujret Wrrunbln.

32. (it ~at einen .ofm In [einem ,SImmer, aber e" Ijl leln Weuer barin.

33. (I" 1ft tin gto,et Unterfd)leb &rolfd)en ~I'tgen unb ~Iesen. 34. ele ~abtn ~itbfd}e !Bitd)et unb lefm alemlld) gut barin. SIS. 3ener eebitler lobt fid>, abet blefer lobi fid} nl4)t. 36. !IDirf(4) IlerblenfllloUe ~eute 10' bm fief) nief)t.

EXERCISE 45. J\"8dt 45.

1. Have you my pen' 2. No, the mason has it. 3. Who has my new black hat' 4. The old hatter has it. 5. Do you give the bresstpin to your mother' 6. No, my sister gives it to her. 7. Does your old neighbor praise his friends' 8. No, he does not praise them, they praise- him. 9. Do you praise your sister' 10. No, I do not praise her. 11. Do you praise your friends! 19. No, I do not praise them. 13. Has your brother your pens? 14. No, my sister has them. 15. What do you give me' 16. I give you nothing. 17. Do you give your friends anything' 18. Yes, I give them money. 19. Has the mason his ball , 20. No, his grandfather has it. 21. Has the milliner your silk hats' 29. No, her friend has them. 23. What do you say to the man' 24. I do not say anything to him. 25. Do you go with your friend to your fathed ~6. No, I go with him to his father. 27. - Do you go with your friend to your mother' 28. No, I go with her to her mother. 29. She goes with me to her. 30. There is no bread on the table. !l. There are no good pens in my desk. 32. These children have pretty books, do they read in them' 33. We have pretty cold weather. 34. Industrious scholars do not praise themselves. 3;. These proud boys praise themselves, but their father does not praise them. 36. We are going with you to your teacher.

LESSON XXV. -

ItcUn XXV.

ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

I.When the possessive pronouns relate, attributively, to a noun understood, and are not followed by an adjective, they are called- absolute possessive pronouns. They are of two forms: meln-ee, e, e~, inflected like an adjective of the old declension; and 'ott', 'oir,-'oaB meln-lge or pet', nle, '0(\6 meln-e, inflected like an adjective of the new declension. ,

J

62 ABSOLUTE PO •• KlI8lVB PB.ONOUNS.

Masculine.

Feminine.

Neuter.

Nom. melnet; Gen. mcine~ ; Dat. meinem; Acc. meinen;

OLD DECLENSION.

melne ; meine~; mine;

melner; mein~; of mine;

meinet; meinem ; to, or for mine;

meine; meine~; .mine.

NEW DECLENSION.

Nom. bet meinlge; ble meinlge; ba~ meinige; mine;

Gen. be~ meinigen; bet meinigen; be~ meinlgen; of mire; Dat. bem meinigen; bet melnigen ; bent melnlgen ; to, for mine j Ace. ben meinigen; bie meinlge; ba~ melntge ; mine.

Nom. bet nteine; bie melne ; ba~ melne ; mine;

Gen. be~ melnen; bet melnen; beB metnen ; of mine;

Dat. bent utelnen ; bet meinen; bent meinen, to, for mine;

Acc. ben metnen ; bie meine; ba~ meine; mine.

All genders in the plural.

OLD. NEW. NEW.

Nom. ftteine; bie nteinigen, or ble meinen; mine;

Gen. melner ; bet metnigen, or bet melnen; of mine ; Dat. meinen; benmeinigen, or ben meinen; to, for mine

Acc. melne ; bie meinigen, or bie meinen ; mine.

EXAMPLES OF THE ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

Form of the old declension. F0rm8 of the new declension.

!neln .put iji fd)ltlaq !ncbl .put iii fd)ltlaq My hat is black and

unb felnet Iii meifj. unb bet felne or bet his is white. . . feinige Iii Itlelfj.

eleln .put lji fd)mata unb Seln .put Iii fd)mata unb His hat is black and

meinet itimeifj. bet melne or bet mel: mine is white. . nige ijimei fj.

!neln &d) lti neu unb !neln !Bud) iii neu unb My book is new and

felnel! ifl alt. bal! felne or bal! fefs his is old.

. nige III aU.

Sein eud) Iii neu uub Stln !Bud) Ifl neu unb His book is new and

melnel! Ijl alt. bal! melne 01' bal! mine is old. melnige Iii alt.

~ ge~t au meinem (it ge~t au melnem He is going to my Wteunb unb nid)t au Wteunb unb nid)t au bem friend and not to

belnem. belnen or bem belnlgen. yours.

2. These pronouns are likewise substantively employed to denote property or obligation; as,

~Ie 21ebe fudlt nimt bal! 3~te. Charity seeks not her own.

3d) ~abe bal! !neillige·lfet~an, t~ue I have done mine (my duty), do

._, bal! ~einlsr. thine.'

, ,

EXERCISES ON ABSOLUTE POll. PRONOUNS. 88

a, In like manner they refer, in the plural, to one's family or relatives: - likewise, when the application is obvious, to . dependents, as servants, soldiers, &c.; as,

(it ~fTl.'ipt bie @lrinigen nld!t. He forsakes not his own.

lit fiel mit ben @leinen In bn He fell with his (soldiers) in

15d!Iad)t. the battle.

3. -'trin and the numeral ein, when not followed by an adjective or a noun, are infl.ected like an adjective of the old declension (except that, in th~ neuter, they often end in , instead of e'); as,

lir ~Ilt ein ~ud!, bu ~all ein~ (or els He has a book, you have one,

nes), uno id) ~abe fein~ (or felne,,). and I have none.

lit ~at awei ~itd)n unb jie ~at He has two books and she has

nur ein~. only one.

h. (,rin when preceded by the definite article is infl.ected like an adjective of the new declension; as,

!ner elne 1ft au gtop unb bet anbne The one is too large and the

iil au fie in. other is too small.

4. The indeclinable forms meintt3slcid/en, 'Deint'sltl!f1tn, &c., may refer to nouns of all genders and both numbers; as,

Sil er benn mtlne~g(eid)en Y Is he my equal then'

15ie waren fr~~et beine"s(eld)en. Theywere formerly your equals.

• . EXERCISE 46. . '.fsoh 46

1. 3d) ~abe melnen !lJinfel unb ben 3~risen, fein ~ud) unb bat! met. nlge, 2. !IDeld)e4 ~afd)entud) ~aben @lIe, ba~ melnige ober ba~ felnige' 3. 3d) ~abe ba~ felnige unb aud) ba~ 3~rige. 4. 3Uliem !.!lrat ge~1l

bu, au bem mtlnlgen ober au bem beinigen ¥ 5. 3d! em beini!len.

6. ~t ~at awei !IDi5detbitd)n, @lie l1aben ein4 unb Id! 4. 7. lIDeI.

dje4 e;anbfap ~at 3~t Wreunb, meinet! obet feine4 Y. at feine~ unb

idl ~abe 3~re~. 9. @lelnmotRlunb III reid) unb melner ill atm. 10. !liMn @;dilitjfd ill gtop unb bet feini!le III fie in. 11. !na4 !IDeltmeer III al1lifd!en mir unb ben !Dlelnigen. 12. !.!lUe !Dlenfdlen Ueben bie 3~ri!len unb ber. Iangen ba~ 3~tige. 13. 3~ ~abe 3~te 3eitung unb @'iie ~aben bie mel. nige. 14. Unfne !Sitdlet liegen au] bem ~ifd!e, unb bie 3~tigen auf bem !I1ulte. 15. !IDeldie !lJferbe ~aben @'iie, ~ie 3~ten cber bie melnen I 16. 3d) ~abe bie 3~ren unb ble melnen. 17. ~((e !Dlenfdien ~aben I~te ~e~ler unb ~igen~eiten, id) ~abe bie meinigen, bu ~Illl bie beinlgen unb er ~at bit fein.!sen. 18. 3ebetmann fd)a~t ba4 @'ieine.

EXERCISE 47. ,afsoh 47.

1. Have you my carriage or yours Y 2. J. have yo'!rs. 3. Has the scholar your book or his Y 4. II", has hIS an~ mll~e. 5. A~e our books in his room or in yours 1 6. They are In mine, and hIS pens are in yours. 7. Do you go with my friend or with yours'l 8. We go with yours. 9. Is his sister or mille in the garden'

n AB80Ll1TB POIIIBII8IVB PRONOUN ••

Masculine.

Feminine.

Neuter.

N 0111, mefnet"; Gen. mcine6 ; Dat. melnem; Ace. melnen;

OLD DECLENSION.

meine; meinet; mine;

melner; melnet; of mine;

melner; memem ; to, or for mine i

meine; meinet; .mine.

NEW DECLENSION.

bit metnlgt; ba6 melnlge ; mine;

bet" meln!gen; be6 melnigen; of mire; bet metnlgen] bent meinigen ; to, for mine i b!e meinige; bat metnlge] mine.

Nom. bet" melnlgt; Gen. bet melnigtn; Dat. nem meinioen; Ace. btn me!nigen;

Nom. bet" melnej bit meme ; baf melne ; mine;

Gen. bet meinen; bet" memen ; beB memen; of mine;

Dat. bent melnen ; bet" meinen; bent meinen, to, for mine i

Ace. ben meinen ; bie mdne; bat melnt; mine.

All gend8rs in the plural.

OLD. NEW. NIliW.

Nom. melne; ble melnlgen, or bie meinenj mine i

Gen. mtinet"; bet melnigen, or bet melnen; of mine; Dat. metnen; ben mt!nigen, or ben melnen ; to! for mine

Ace. melne j bie meinigtn, or ble melnen j mine.

EXAMPLES OF THE ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

Form of the old declension. Forms of the new declension.

!neln .put Ijl fd)lI)ata !ncht .put Ijl fd)lI)ara My hat is black and

unb relnet IlllI)elj. unb bet felne or bet his is white. . . feinlge 111 lI)elj.

eeln .put 111 fd)lI)ata unb eeln .put 111 fd)lI)ata unb His hat is black and

metnee IlllI)elj. bet meine or bet met. mine is white. . nlge 111 lI)eij.

!neln !Bud) III neu unb !neln !Bud) Illneu unb My book is new and

rtfne" 111 alt. ball felne or ba' ret. his is old.

. nlge 111 a(t.

Eein eud) III neu uub Eeln !Bud) ijl neu nnb His book is new and

melne. ijl alt. ball melne 01' ball mine is old. melntge ill alt.

Cit ge~t au meillem Cit 8e~t au melnem He is going to my Wteunb nnb nld)t au Wteunb unb nld)t ~u bem friend and not to

belnem. beinen or bem bemlgen. yours.

2. These pronouns are likewise substantively employed to denote property or obligation; as,

~Ie ~Iebe fuellt nhilt bat! S~te. Charity seeks not her own.

3d) ~abe ball !ntflllge.!fet~an, t~ue I have done mine (my duty), do

ball ~einlsc. thine.

BXERCltlES ON ABSOLUTE POSS. PRONOUNS. 88

a. In like manner they refer, in the plural, to one's family or relatives: - likewise, when the application is obvious, to • dependents, as servants, soldiers, &c.; as,

<ir ~tr(lijjt ble @leinigelt nldlt. He forsakes not his own.

<if ~d mit ben @ltinen In bef He fell with his (soldiers) in

Ed}lad)t. the battle.

3. -'ttin and the numeral tin, when not followed by an adjective or a noun, are inflected like an adjective of the old declension (except that, in th~ neuter, they often end in , instead of el); as,

([r ~at ein !Budl, bu ~aft eln~ (or ti. He has a book, you have one,

nes), unD Id) ~abe fcin~ (or feine~). and I have none.

([r ~at awe! !Biid)et unb jie ~at He has two books and she has

nur ein~.· only one.

b. ~in when preceded by the definite article is inflected like an adjective of the new declension; as,

mer eine ift au gro; unb bet Ilnbete The one is too large and the

ift au fieill. other is too small.

4. The indeclinable forms meine'gIcid)en, beinelgleid]en, &c., may refer to nouns of all genders and both numbers; as,

3ft er benn meine~gIeld)en? Is he my equal then Y

@>ie waren fr~~et beine~9(eld)en. Theywere formerly your equals.

• . EXERCISE 46. . ",'soh 46.

1. 3d) ~Ilbe melnen $Infel unb ben 3~rigen, [eln !Bud) unb ba~ mel. nige. 2. mleId)e~ Xllfd)entud) ~Ilben @>ie, bll~ mcinige ober bll~ felnlge? 3. 3d) ~Ilbe bll~ feillige unb Ilud) bQ~ 3~rllle. 4. su_em \1(tat ge~ft

bu, au bern mtinigen ober au bem beinlgen f 5. 3d1 em beinlgen.

6. &r ~Ilt Awei 9Ilorterbiid)er, @lie ~a&en ein~ unb id) ~. 7. lIDel.

dle~ ellnbflljj ~at 3~r ~reunb, melne~ cber feine~ ~. at feine~ unb

Idl ~a&e 3~re~. 9. @lein illornlunb ift reid) unb meluer ift arm. 10. !lJleln @>d)liilfeI 1ft grojj unb ber felnillt ift rtein. 11. !I>a~ 9IleUmeer III a11lifdlen mit unb ben IDlelnlgen. 12. \1(Ue !incllfd1cn Ueben bit 3~tI~en unb "ct. langen bil~ 3~tige. 13. 3~ ~Ilbe 3~re Seitung unb @lie (,aben bie meb nige. 14. Unfete !8ild)et Iiegen Iluf bem Xifdle, unb ble 3~rigen auf bem !jluUe. 15. mleld)e !lJferbe ~aben @>ie, lile 3~ren obet ble melnen 1 ] 6. 3d) ~abe ble 3r,ren unb ble melnen, 17. @tUe !inenfd)en ~aben I~re ~e~let unb &igen~eitell, Id) ~Ilbe ble meinigen, bu ~atl bie beinlgen unb er ~at bit fein.!gen. 18. 3ebermann fd)l'iet bQ~ @leine.

EXERCISE 47. ,afooh 47.

I. Have you my carriage or yours ~ 2. I have yours. 3. Has Ibe scholar your book or his 1 4. He has his and mine. 5. Are our books in his room or in yours 1 6. They are in mine, and his pens are in yours. 7. Do you go with my friend or with yours 1 8. We go with yours. 9. Is his sister or mine in the garden'

USE OF THE TENSES

10. Yours is in the garden, and his is going into the garden.

11. Have you my pen oryours ~ 12. I have neither yours nOl mine, I have his. 13. Have you our books or yours? 14. We have yours and ours. 15. Our house is new and yours is old. 16. His pen is good and hers is bad. 17. Are your friends ill your house or in ours ~ 18. They are in ours. . 19. We have OUl friend's horses and he has ours. 20. Your paper is white an( ours is blue.

LESSON XXVI.

gtctin XXVI.

• USE OF THE TENSES.'

1. The present is often used in relation to the past, whei the period referred to is still unfinished; as,

3d11efe fd)on elne ~tunbe. I (have) read already an hour.

mlie lanse jinb ~ie In ~m'ben ? How long are you (have y01

been) in Dresden 1

2. The present for the future is more usual in Germei than in English; as,

IDloTsen sc~e Id) nad) 2el~~ls. To.morrow I (.balI) go to Leipsic 3d) se&e 3~nen elnen @ulben fUt I give (will give) you a florin fo

ba~ i8ud). . . the book.

3. The impeifect corresponds. mainly to the same tense iJ

English; as, •

%rlebtld) beT Bllle!te Illat eln Sto~et Frederic the second was a graa

jtTieger. warrior..

~Ie ar&eltete, 1\)a~renb Id) fl'lelte. She worked while I was playing

4. In tenses 'and principal sentences, the in1ini

tive or last; as, .

jd) ~a&e I have had a book.

3d) 1\)erbe lo&en. I shall praise the' man.

<ir ~at nid)t Beit ba~ i8ud) au lefen. He has not time to read the book

<ir 1\)lrb etl St~a&t ~a&en. He will have had it.

5. The peifect, unlike the same tense in English, may be usee WIth an adverb referring to past, as well as to present time; as

3d) ~a&e etl sejlern ge~a&t. I (have) had it yesterday.

6. The futures are used as in English, and also to indicate a probability; in which case the'jirst future is to be renderer by the present, and the second future, by the imperfect, or ptJf' feet, in connection with an appropriate adverb , as,

<it 1\)irb 3~r i8rubet feln. He is probably your brother.

~Ie 1\)erben etl !le~ott ~aben. They have probably heard it.

7. Often, in German, a verb is repeated, or entirely omitted, wbere in English an auxiliary is employed; as,

fir bmlt wle lei) (or, wit 14) benh). He thinks as Ida (or, asl think).

eft leanen ~n, lei) nfd)t. You know him, I (do) not.

3111 ~abe e~ 9t~ott,tt nlel)t (or, er I have heard it, he (has) not. He

~3t t~ nld)t ge~ott). has not heard it.

S. CONJUGATION OF ~ a.fJ e n.

INFINITIVE

Present. ~abtn, to have.

Perfect.

ge~afJt ~afJm, to han Mol.

PAJl.TICIPLES.

Present. ~a"'ll, having.

Petfect. ge~afJt, had.

INDlc"ATIVE.

Singular. ilf? ~afJt; I have; bu ~afl, thou hast ; er ~at, he has ;

PUSENT.

I1llr ~afJm, we have. i~r ~afJt, you have"; . fie ~afJen, they have.

ilf? ~atte, I had ;

bu ~attefl, thou hadst ; er ~atte, he had;

IJO'EIlFECT.

• l1lir ~atten, we had ; i~t ~attet, you had; fit ~atten, they had.

PERJ'J:CT.

ilf? ~afJe }:..:- I have }.. l1lit ~afJen } _ .. we have } • b!, ~afl ! thou hast ] i~t ~aliet ! you have ]

er ~at ~ he has fie ~alien' ~ they have

PLUPERFECT.

id1 ~atte l.i" I had I'· l1lit ~atttn }...:- we had I . bu ~attetl $. thou hadst ] i~t ~atttt ! you had ]

er ~atte ~ he ha~ fit ~atttn ~ they had

J'IRST J'UTURE.

1d1l1ltrbe I =.. I shall I'· l1lit l1lerbm} = .. we Shan} •

bu l1litfl ~ thou wilt : i~t l1ler'llet ~ you will ~

er l1litb $. he will J fie Iller'll en $. they will ,..d

. SECOND J'UTURE.

ilf? lUer'lle } ., - I shall } i lUir l1ler'Den l- - we ,shall } 1 bu l1litfl i! thou ~lt "! i~r IUtt'Det i~ you wi~l ..

ff witb ;.z he Will ] fie I1ltt'Den - they Will .5

IMPERATIVE

~a&t (bu), have (thou). ~abet or'~alit (i~t) have (ye, or you).

He likes a warin room. Love all men.

I have no objection.

It is no matter (worth speaking

00.

He feels ennui ("bored"). He does not suspect you.

I suspect him of having (to have)

stolen.

He is not in want of money. I will attend to (take care on him. What ails you 1 You may well laugh.

.. Am I right, or wrong'

66 IDIOMS AND BJ:EROIII~S WITH ~ Illi en.

9. IDIOMS WITH ~ Il ben.

(it ~at (lent eln lIlatme~ ,simmer. {;a&e aUe IDlenfd)en lIe&.

3d) ~a&e nid)t~ ba(legen.

Ci~ ~at nld)t~ au fagen.

Cit ~at ~angeltlelle.

CiT ~at felnen :iBetbad)t aitf @Sle.

3d) ~a&e i~n In :iBerbad)t gejlo~len

AU ~a&en.

(ir ~at fein @clb not~lg.

3d) Itlerbe !ld)t aUf I~n ~alien. !IDa" ~afi bu?

!Du ~afi (lut laif/en.

.palie Iif/ ted)t obet unuif/tY

~'- • A

.. , +." -\ EXERCISE 48.

•

cJa(SlIh 48.

•

1. !Det jlrenge aIte ~e~tet be~ teldJen 3itngling~ ~atte In felnet 3ugmb

elnen guten ~e~rer (le~a&t. 2. .!teln Welb~ert ~at [e elne lieffete !lnnee 9~ ~a&t al~ ber ftanaofifd)e .!talfet. 3. !DIe Cingldnber ~atten (a!lSe e1uea fe~r CUI~ge&relteten .panbel ge~alit uub ~atten ba~er elne &effne \jlotte alf bie Wrauaofen. 4. lIDlrb blefe~ ievt fo "rufll\ije ~anb ie elnen .!t6nI(l obrc elnen .!taifer ~alien ? I). !DIe Wreunbe ber (L. 46.) !IDa~t~e1t unb @md). tigfelt III (!uro"a Itletben ~te fdlllmmjle ,selt nod) nid)t(L. 66.b.)ge~abt ~aben. 6. @Sic lIlerben [einen :!Brief ge~a&t ~alien, e~e ee fommt; benn rc Ulirb ftid)t "Ot adJt U~r fommen. 7 • .pa&en @Sie !')orgejlern :!Befud) ge~a&t' 8. !neln, Id) ~a&e feluen ge~alit, unb lIlerbe aud) felnen ~a&en; benn Id) ~abe felne \Jrellube In blefet @egenb. 9. Ciln :iBetlllanbter 3~tef \Jreunbe~ madJt melnem :!Bruber elnen :!Befuif/. 10. !IDie lange lIlo~nea @Sle in biefem .paufe' 11. lIDlr Itlo~nen fd)on langet al~ae~n 3a~u blldlr.

EXEROISE 49.

cJa(sdt 49.

1. No army has ever had a better general than Napoleon.

2. What nation has had a more extensiv~ commerce than England 1 3. Have the French ever had a better :fleet than they now have 1 4. Kings and emperors do not always (L';~9. 8.) love truth and justice. 5. That country is very unfortunate', for it has a bad king. 6. The friends of (L. 46.) truth in this country have probably had their worst time. 7. How long have you had this wagon 1 8. Did you have company yesterday? 9. We had company day before yesterday, but we have had none to-day. 10. Haveyou relations in this city? 11. No, I have no relations in this COUl!trY, 12. This relation of my friend is making us a visit.

13. Who lias ever had, or ever will have better friends than we 1

14. How long have you been in this city 1 _

CONJUGATION OF THli RliGULAJI. qa.~ ..,'

LESSON XXVII.

ItcUn XXVII.

BGULAJI. VERBS OR VERBS OF THE NEW CONJUGATION.

PRESENT 1l0·INITIVE.

The present infinitive ends in en; as,

I, to praise; Hcli-en, to love; bet-en, to pray;

'en, to study; !)trf(luf-en, to sell; betttl-n,· to beg.

Root.

The root is that part or the verb which precedes the en I infinitive, and to which the various terminational endare suffixed. Thus, the roots of the above verbs are, :ltll-, bet-, flubir-, !)trfauf-, &c.

PRESENT PARTICIPLII.

The present participle is formed by suffixing enb .'0 the as,

b, praising; Heb-enb, loving; bet-enb, praying; -mb, studying; !)erf(luf-enb, selling; bettel-nb,· begging.

PERFECT PARTICIPLE.

The perfect participle is formed by suffixing t or et, and IJ'bs that have the accent on the firstlyllable), prefixing

:agmen~ ae to the root; as, .

-t, praised ; ; ae-Hell-t, loved; at-bet-d, prayed;

·t, studied; !)erf(luf-t, sold; Se-betteI-t, begged .

s. The participles are subject to the same rules of deion and comparison (except that they do not take the lit) as the adjective; as, '&enbn mater.

-lIebte matn.

:ftnbtn !n(lltt.

elnenbe.

t(luembe.

U]tenbjle <5d)auflllet

A loving father.

The beloved father. The traveling painters. The weeping one.

The mourner.

The most touching spectacle •

.

PRESENT TICNSE.

The first person singular adds e, the second efl or fl,t ie third et or tt to the root; as,

ben tbe root Ponds in fl. orer, Ihe f of tbe termination I. dropped ; u. beUd-lI, instead of bettel-en, litter-tn. o!r.c. The e of the root II aloo often dropped I. penon singular of the present ; RI. lei) bert-Ie, iDOtead f( lei) bett·de • .!te.

lbe Indicative, the shorter forma <It and t) are uauaUy preferred wbere eupboaJ lit; ... lobit, lobt. rether then lobeit, lobet, o!r.c.

88 , CON1lJGATION 01' THE REGULA .. VERB.

lit. P .... "" Si"lf'llar. 2d. P .... "" Siwgvl4r. 3d. P .... "" Si..,.w

lei) lob-e, I praise; bu lob-~, thou praisest j et lob-t, he praises;

td) bet-e, I )lray j bu bet-e~, thou prayest ; ee bet-et, he prays;

IdJ jiublr-e, Tstudy j bu ~Ublt-jl, thou studieat; ee ~ublt-t, he studies; Id) fdJnelb-e, I cut; bu fd)neib·ejl, thou cuttest; er fel)ndb-et, he cuts.

The first and third person plural add en, and the second \'t or t to the root; as,

lit. P .... "" PIII.f"Gl, 3d. Pori"" PI.NIl.

IUlt lob-en, we praise; lie lob-en, they praise;

IUlt bet-en, we pray; fie bet-en, they pray;

lUit leib-en, we suffer; lie Ielb-en, they suffer;

2d. P .... "" Pi .....

I~t lob-d, or lob-t,· you praise;

I~r bet-et, you pray; I~t leib-rl. you suffer;

IMPERFECT TENSE.

6. The first and third persons singular add te, and the second person, teji (if the root endin b, or t, ete and eteji are added); as,

Id) lob-te, I praised; ee lob-te, he praised; bu lob-tejl, thou praisedst; IdJ febilf-te, Isent; erfdillf-te, he sent; bu fd)hf-tejl, thou sentest; Id) bet-ete, I prayed; ee bet-ete, he prayed; bu bet-etell, thou prayedst;

The first and third persons plural add ten, and the second tet (if the root end in b, or t, den and det are added); as,

IUlt lob-ten, we praised; fie fob-ten, they praised;l~t lob·tet, you praised; IUlt fd)hf-ten, we sent ; fie fdJllf-ten, they sent; . t~t fd)llf-tet, you sent: lUit bet-eten.,)Ve prayed; fie bet-eten, they prayed; I~t bet-etet, you prayed

PERFEOT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES.

7. The perfect and pluperfect are formed by combining the perfect participle with the present and the imperfect of ~'l6en (or fein); as,

Id) ~Qbe Sdq.bt;

Id) ~atte serobt; IUlt ~atten se~ad; fie ~a:6en seIernt;

I have praised;

I had praised;

we had heard; they ~ave learned.

FIBST AND BECOND FUTURE TENSES.

8. The first and second futures are formed by combining the present and perfect infinitive with the present, of the auxiliary tuetben j as,

td) lUetbe loben; I shall praise;

Id) lUetbe gdobt ~Q&en ; • I shall have praised;

fie IUltb fd}llfen ; she will send;

fie lUerben fPi~len ; they will play.

COIUUOATlON 01' THB RBOULAR VEllB Beflen. 69

9. CONJUGA.TION OF THB REGULA.R VERB Heflen.

INI'lNITIVK.

Prelem.

Dthtrl, to love.

Perfs:t.

. Benefit ~alitn, to have loved.

P ABTICIPLII8.

Present, Iie6tnb, loving.

Singular.

IIf) lieM, I love;

bu Iiebfi, thou lovest; tf lid;t, he loves;

I N D I CAT I V E.

Perfect.

Belieflt, loved.

Plural.

PBDKII'I' TENSK.

",it lieflen, we love; i~t Heliet, you love; 1ie Heflen, they love.

i~ Utflte, I'loved;

bu Utbtefi, thou lovedst; . tf lte&te, he loved;

UIP:&IlJ'KCT TENSE.

",it Helittn, we loved; i~t liefltet, you loved; 1ie Ueliten, they loved.

PERRCT TEKSE. icf; ~Qbe ~ _' I have } ~ ",it ~Qlien

bu ~Qfi ~ thou hast ~ i~t ~allt

tt ~Qt ~. he has .s 1ie ~Q&en

PLUPEKnCT TENSE.

icf; ~atte f;i I had } ~ ",it flatten bu ~attefi -= thou hadst ~ t~t ~attet tf ~atte ~ he had oS fie ~atten

} ." we have !

~ youhave " ~ they have .s

J ' we had} .

~ you had 1

~ theyhad oS

rmaT fUTURE TENSE.

I shall }." ",it werben; =' we Shall} .

thou wilt ~ i~t ",erbet J:i you will ~

he will - 1ie ",erben = they will oS

SECOND fUTURE TENSE.

I shall } "i ",it werben I s, we shall } j thou wilt S flit werbet i! you will .;

he will 5 fie werben i they will .8

.<I

IMPERATIVE.

!ie&e (bu) love (thou). Utllet or nelit (i~t), love (ye or you)

EXERCISE 50. &\lIfgobt 50.

1. fillad ~(1ben ~ie ~eute in !Bremen gefauftJ 2. 3e!) ~abe ~ellte Bar uid1td geflluft, aller Ie!) faijfte gejiem ein !llaar (L. 47. 3.) .p'mbfe!)u~e, !I\>ei !I1a(1t @)d1u~e uub ein~u~enb ~afd1entud1er. 3. ~er !muller ~(1t gejiem ~unbett W(1j !me~ll)edatlft. 4. ~er !8ud)biinblet ~Clt mit sejietll

•

70 DECLENSION OF THE RELATIVE tndd)U.

alllei !Bud) @5d)telT!\la\lfet (L. 18. 3.) unb brei !Bud/ !Brtef\lG\!11 fdlldt. 5. !nie liltern IIlerbm i~r~ fIeipiflen .ltinber loben unb TIde 6. Unfere ~tunbe IIlerben morgen ober iiberml)rgen 3u un. fommen. 'l !Reformation madlte ben !niebetldnbern ba~ f~al1ifd)e 3ocl) unttue unb lIledte bei i~nen bat! merlangen unb ben llnutl) et! au aetbt 8. mon mem ~afl bu blere !netd)tid)t ge~od, unb Ilhlrum glllubfl nldlt Y 9. ~iir reen ~Ilben 6ie bat! !l3ferb unb ben mlagen bel

10. »Ilerben 6fe morgen nad) ber 6tabt ober au 3~Tem ~teunbe .91

11. 3d) IIlerbe nld)t au I~m ge~en, benn er lIlirb nidlt au .paure [el lIlitb morgen tin en langen 6\laaiergang mad)m. 12 . .pat er frll~er I liitabt (L. 47. 1.) .pannotlcr gelllo~ntY 13. (it ~at In bem .toni, aber nicl)t in bet liitabt .pannotlet gelllo~nt. 14. 61e folgten un', bl (Iud) begegneten. 16. !nie 6tabt !partt! Uegt an ber 6elne, uub »Ill ber !nonau.

EXERCISE 51. ".'8Ith 51.

1. Have you ever lived in the city of Bremen Y 2. Why .you not studied your lesson to-day? 3. I have studied it but not yet learned it, for it is a very difficult one. 4. Our COt have engaged a horse and a wagon and will come to us to-mor 6. How many quires of paper, and how many dozen pens I you ~uy ? 6. L shall buy no paper and no pens, but I shall b pair of shoes, two pairs of gloves and ten pounds of coffee., 7. ' brother has probably heard this news. 8. Our parents took a walk this morning and we shall take one this evening. 9. V shall you go to Paris, and when will you come to my cow

10. Is the city of Bremen larger than the city of Hano

11. Did not your friends formerly live in Vienna f 12. Shaf be at home to-morrow evening? 13. The shoemaker has I me two pairs of shoes, and is making my brother a pair of b 14. We have boughs a horse and sold our oxen.

LESSON XXVIII.

lectin XXV'III.

1. The pronoun tneld)er, is used as a relative and anal to who, which, that.

DECLENSION OF THE RELATIVE tn e I clj tf.

Singular. Plural.

IIUSO. FEM. NBUT. ALL GENDERS.

N. lIleld)er, IIldd)e, lIleld)e., lIleld)e, who, which, that;

o ~ lIleld/e., lIleld/er, lIleld)et!, lIleld)er, ~ whose, of whoa

. ~ bellen, berm, beifen, beren 5 which, &c. ;

D. lIleld/em, lIleld)er, lIleld)em, lIlelmen,to, for whom, which

.4. lIleld)en, lIleld)e, lIleld)ea, IIlcld)e, whom, which, that.

2. The forms befl"en, beren, of the genitive, are genei used, except when the pronoun is ~oUowed by the nou

which it belongs; as, .

•

llELATIVE PRONOUN.

71

!)rr!ltaJm, btft'm (notIDetefle,)!Bud) III ~, III ft<Ulf.

mttro, IDdd)e' ~rofien !Jtebnerl! eiil)riften Iefl fe~e.

~t etllte, berm (not IDe{efltt) @eIb elt ~al!en, jinb teld).

The man whose book I have is sick.

Cicero, which great orator's writings I am acquainted with.

The people whose money you have are rich.

8. In relative sentences the verb is placed lut; as,

~ !lIlann, IDtIdlen Id) lobe, III ann. The man whom I praise is poor. ~ !IJlann, IDeId)er m~ lobt, 1ft The man who praises me (who

jlelfilg. me praises) is industrious.

3d) lobe ben !!Jlann, IDdefler jlelfilg I praise the man who is inijl. dustrious (who industrious is).

4. In compound tenses the main verb immediately precedes the auxiliary; . as,

~n !!Jlann, IDe(d)en Iefl gdobt ~abe, The man whom I have praised,

Ift3~ \Jtennb. is your friend.

EXAJlPLES.

Pnncipal Sentence. Relative Sentenu.

ll)lefe' 1ft ba' !Buefl, IDdd)e' Id) ge~abt ~Ilbe.

3ft er ber !IJlann, IDtId)er fo reid) 1ft Y

.pabcn lile ge~crt, IDa' er gefagt ~at Y

.pat er bon ID1ann geIolit, IDe{d)en ht) gelobt ~Ilbe'

!JUeflt aUe jinb Aufdeben, IDeld)e reid) jinb.

t. The relative sentence is frequently introduced between he parts of the principal one; (compare L. 26. 4.); as,

8ulJject of the Relative Sentence. Predicate of the

.Principal Sentence. Principal Sentence.

!nid)t 9UIt, . IDelcf)e reid! jinb, jinb auftleben.

~er aUt !!Jlann, IDeld)en @lIe geIolit ~alien, ~at @lIe geIobt.

~tt iunge @lo[bat, IDtId)er I~n gelobt ~at, ~at aud! mldJ gelolit.

utile', IDa' er gefagt ~at, Ill!)e\ jlanbllcll. .

6. Many other conjunctive words require the same collo-

cation {L. 89.}; as,

(fr ~at me~t @elb ge~abt, aU Id) ge~abt ~alie.

@lie Iftli6fe, IDeil er ba' !Bud) ge~alit ~Clt.

!IDit IDarteten, lil" Illir e' ge~cd ~atten. .

@lIe Illerben fommm, IDenn jie nldJt franf jinb.

!IDir fbill Auftleben, obgleidJ Illir arm flnb.

<ir Illo~nt nod), IDo ee gelllo~nt ~Qt.

7. The pronoun 'oer, 'ote, 'Da~, is often used as a relative; as, 3d! lobe ben ID1ann, b e r ntiCh lo~ I 'praise the man that praises me. !!ltt !!nllnn, ben Id) lobe, fobt mid). 'nle mao 'hat I praise, praises me.

72

RELA.TIVE PRONOUN •••

In this signification, its form is the same 8S t.Dat of tlle aJIo tic1e, except in the genitive singular, and in the genitive aDd

dative plural. ",

DECLENSION OF '0 e f, '0 i e, '0 Il e, AS RELATIVE PRONOllN.

Si1!gUlar. Plural.

MABC. rEM. NEUT. ALL GENDERS.

N. 'oer, 'oie, 'o~, 'oie, who, that, which;

G. 'oejfen, 'oeren,' 'oefi"en, 'oeren, whose;

D. 'oem, 'oer, 'oem, 'omen, to,forwhcm, that,which;

A. ben, 'oie, bile, bie, whom, that, which.

8. The indeclinable fo, is sometimes used as a relative j.a8,.

!!:lIe (;elligen, fo ClUf litben j1nb. The saints that are on earth.

9. Wff may be used with the force of an antecedent and relative; or may be followed by the pronoun 'off in a sub- •

sequent clause j as, '

mlet meinen ~eutd 111e~lt, flle~lt Who steals my purse steal.

~anb. trash.

mlen bet (;m lieil ~, ben aliel)tlget Whom the Lord loveth (him or

cr. that one), he chasteneth.

10. !Wile is used with the force of antecedent and relative: it also stands as a simple relative after an antecedent that does not refer definitely to a previously expressed noun j as,

3d! rage 3~nen, mad Iel) Mde; or I tell you what I heard. • 3d! fa~e 3~nen bad, mild Id) ~6tte. I tell you that which I heard: merfle~en @Sle !lUrd, mad Iel) fage Y Do you understand all that I say'

11. !Welcf>ff is sometimes used in the sigfti1ication of " some" ., or "any" -, as a substitute for a preyiously ex-

pressed nOlDl; as, .

3el) ~abe ~tob, ~all bu ClUel) meld1ee' I have some- bread', have you some tooY

(Sdllcfen @Sie mit tthlat1 mlein, menn Send me some wine, if you have

@Sle meld)en ~Qben. any (or some),

12. In referring to animals, and things, an adverb (formed from an adverb and a preposition) is used instead of a Jr~

noun and a preposition (L. 38. 6.); &1'1, .:

!!:lat'l !Jne!iet, momit Iel) fel)lIeibe. The bue with which (wher&-

WIth) [ cut.

mJeifjt !Du, mo~on er fl!tid)tY Do you know, what he is speak-

ingo£?

Literally; do you know whereof he speaks'

*) ··8 ..... ", or """'I", before nouns, i8 t~~ .• 1 InntoGerman. only wben It IIfpUIeI , _ lull. or _/-. In wbicb Ole it ie rencMed bJllfhlld. or e!n!Qcr. Bee 1.. U. .. 7.

ilf -,.

~C"~8 ON THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 73

fir ~ sentences the copula is not unf~t1quently

!; as, ,

Rn, ben id) !lefe~en, III fe~t The man whom I have seen ill very poor.

Qd)t IllQf gfojef, QU jie ef' His power was greater than they • gtojef, al6 fie gellli'lnfel}t had expected, greater than

they had wished.

\Then the relative pronoun refers to the first or second the personal pronoun is repeated after the relative; as, fJ ~iel} fo geliebt ~Qbe. I who have so loved thee.

uft fo arm jinb. We who are so poor.

i)u fo gliicfllel} bill. Thou who art so fortunate.

"he relative is sometimes placed before the word to ; refers; and is sometimes entirely omitted; as,

L WIi~rer lJatten, benen IllQt Who had no guide, to them she

~r, instead of, was (a) guide.

benen WIi~tet, bit feinm She was (a) guide to those who

lJatten. had no guide.

den, felttlen i~n nlel}t. (Those) that think thus do not

know him.

EXERCISE 52. J\afsoh 52.

men ele '~eute ble fd)onen ~fetbe, llleId)e Iel} Bellm ge~abt ~Qbe'

id) 4abe belt mlQgen gefQuft, bell eie l!Of9!tfent ~jtten. 3. 3ft • I, Illelel)tt 3~ten mlQgtn ~Qt, ~t !8mbet t 4 •. !JhlIr." ill bet

~ !lnanne6, in bejfen {iaufe jie"~'f1II.tn. IS. ~Ie .lnabm,beren

, ~aben, jinb bie .!tinber bet Wfau, bucn @elb Illir lJIiben. 6. ~tr

~t be~ .!tnaben, ben bie !!nutter lobt. ,. ~aG .eauG, baG iel) ge.

e, III fe~t -fd)OIt. 8. ~cr Wreunb, mit Illeld)em id) In bit .Rird)e

in Vlll"l~er. 9. mler @Jelb ~at. ~at gelllo~nlid) aud) Wreunbe, relnl f1at, ~at oft feine. 10. ~er fleine mogel, bm fie bod auf

e fe~en, ill eln <5"eding. 11. ~er Jbiabe, Illelel)et nld)t jleijlg

· guter <5d)i'def. 12. ~er .eunb, ben Id) ievt ~abe, ijlgut, Qbet

!, ben id) ~Qtte, ill nid)t gut. '13 .. merlle~el1 3~re <5d)i'llef VlUeG, ~ntn fagen Y 14. <5le tletlle~en, rea" id) fl'ted)e, abet nld)t, lIlaG iel}

~ie <5d)u~e, ble mir bet <5d)¥ad)er gemad)t ~at, finb AU tItg. &letbef, bellen 1\eber bet <5atder-~at. III ein teid)et !!nann. 17. ~et me bel ben ®abelt @otte" iii Illie (L. 67. 6.) ein !Vlmfd). bet bet Ljlma~( ~ungett. 18. &ine" !lnbem eegen til bem !ltetbtf~en • bet 14n tlet,iiJunbet; eine" S}(nbem ed)aV iii bem !Jlelblfd)en elne ~n fravu; flne" !lnbem .!tunjl ill bem !Jlelbifd)en ein ~unli, fo ~O. 7.) ble !lugen pelniget,

EXERCISE 53. J\afSllh 58.

l dog that I bought yesterday is very large. 2. The men ioks I have are your friends. 3. The man of whom yo~ dog is a ~ther of the shoemaker who made your sho,_

4'

'.,

74

DETERMINATIVE PRONOUn.

4. 'l'he's!o've that you have in your rt?0m belon~ my fri~a.

5. My friend whose stove you have in your room IS a very ncb man. 6. Does he understand all that you say to him 1 7. He understands all that I say but not what you say. 8. The 1:oolal that you see on that table, belong to the boy who has your pen. 9. The men whom you see in the garden are my neighbors. 10. The man in whose house we live is a tanner. 11. This child is the SOD of an old lady who is in that church. 12. The woman whose SOD made our table is in the house. 13. The mother praises the childthat loves the father. 14. The foreigner with whom I am going into the garden is a Frenchman. 15. The books that your sister has bought are not new. 16. A boy who is industrious is a good . scholar, 17. A man who is lazy is generally poor. 18. You who are so industrioua will learn much. 19. I do not understand what you say.

,.

. LESSON·XXIX.

,uU .. XXIX.

DETERMINATIVE PRONOUN ••

1. !Der, bie, baBjeniee; bet, bie, baBfel6e (declined like ber, ble; 'DaB mcintee, &c., L. 25.), and fO(d)et, refer to something specified in a succeeding clause; as,

!I)erjcnige, 1ll~{djCt nad){ajiig ill, {erot He (the one) who is negligent

nid)t fd)neU. does not learn rapidly.

lIDir loben biejenigen, ble Illit lIeben. We praise those whom we love. <ir lIejl ba~ftlbe mud), bat! id; lefe. He reads the same 'book that J

. read.

!I)u ~ajl ~eute benfef&cn mleijlift, ben You have the same pencil to-day

Id) ilejletn ~atte. that I had yesterday.

lIDir Iejen nut fold)e miid)er, Illeld)e We read only such books III

{e~rreid). finb. (which) are instructive.

2, For betjeniee, bet may be substitued, in which use its genitive plural is betet instead of beren; as,

.part Ijl baa @)clJhffa{ beret (betje. Hard is the fate of those who nigen), bit fidJ nld)t et'nd~tell'fon. cannot support themselves: nen; fie faUen gelllii~n!idJ benen . they generally fall (become) aut' ~ajl, ble man 9MclJe nennt. a burden to those who are

called the rich. ~

lDet, ben bu meinjl, ~at ben !JJrelt! The one that you mean, bas not

nldJt gelllonnell. won the prize.

3d) bin Ilid)tuon benen,lIie mlPIDor. I am not of those WOo are valiant

, ten tavfer fillb~ with words. .

S. In referring to animals, or t'!iilgs, or when the genitive is used partitiveJ,y j as also to avoid ~lepetition or ambiguity i berfd1ie is often substituted for a personal pronoun j as,

--

i:xBRclsa OM DBTERIIINATIVE PRONOUN.. 75

err ~at mela !lRtfftt anb fdlnelbd JIe has my kni re and is cutting

ftinen 9ll'ftl mit bemfd&ea (or his apple WIth it (with the

bamit L. 24. 14.) same).

it fellneibet [eineu Q(l'iel, unb Si&t He cuts his apple and gives me

mit elnen :t~eil btjfdben. a part of it (of the same J.

it Iebt ben .ltnaben, "'til htfel&e He praises the boy because he

feine !nutter ellft. (the same) honors his mother.

it lieot felnen !Brubtt, abet nid)t He .oves his brother but not his

He .ltinbtt bejfe1ben. (brother's) children.

4. Sold)er is sometimes used instead of a demonstrati ve or . personal pronoun; as,

mG tt fcld1eG l)ottc u. f. "'. As he heard this (such), &c.

~ie 15ellndlillfeit mit bet tt foldleG The rapidity with which he exe-

aUGfiif)de, u. f. ro. cuted it (such), &c.

5. The adverb eben is often used (intensively) before ollerfd(.e and ber; as,

(it Itl eben berfelbe. He is the very same.

6. The indeclinable felbjt (or felber) is often used after a noun or pronoun, and answers to self or selves; as,

° met !nllnn fe1bjl faEite eG. The man said it himself.

3ell felbjl faf) ben IDlann. I saw the man myself.

3d) faf) ben IDlann felbft. I saw the man himself.

UBlt frl&ft l)aben t". We have it ourselves.

!£lie Selliiltt loben fid) felbft. The scholars praise themselves.

7. Sdbjt is also often an adverb equivalent to "even"; as,

15elbtl bet .ltnabe f)atte e" Stt~an. Even the boy had done it.

EXERCISE 54. &\ufSllbe 54.

1. !IDit loben blejenigen, bie rolr lieben, unb l)a\ien anroeilen blejenigen, bie roir noell nld)t (L. 66. b.) fennen. 2. 3d) l)abe aroei fef)t fmone !l3ferbe stflluft, l)aben l5ie biefdbtn gefef)tn? (l)ajl bu fie gefef)en ¥) 3. ,,!i)u ftlbft bijl brln :trufel obet (ingel". 4. <it l)at ble Wel)let tine" gto;en IDlan. ne", ol)ne bie metbienfte btjfdben. 6. met !Rul)m bejfen, btt lugt, blluett nimt lange. 6. 3m fel)e baf Wenfter bef .paufe", abet nid)t ble :tf)iite be'" felben. 7. 20btll @iie bie @)d)liler, "'ell biefelben lleijiig finb? B. 3d) l)abe ble Webtm 3l)tet Wreunbe, abtt nid)t ble IDleifet berfelben. 9. mer ()~elm (iebt ftlnen !Relfen, abet bttfelbe ijl unbanfbar. 10. 3d! fdlicfe bie: fen Sling bemfelben IDlanne. bee 1l)1I mit gefmilft bat. 11. l5ie l)\\bm !SAmet genug, roarum Iefen fie blefelben nidlt V 12. {laben @ile lIeute bell: ftlben !IDllgen, ben @iie geftetn ge~abt l)llben? 13. !}lein, id) 1)llbe bell' jeniElen, ben eie Ilotgejletn ge~\\bt ~abell. 14. ~et brll\le !D11l1lU bmft all ~d1 felbjl Atlle~t. 15. Wit lieben niltt ~lle, ble l1.lit leben, 16. !!!lit fen: aen fie, abet roir l1.lijfen nidit, roo fie l1)o~nen. 17. 3m Ieje nut folme

• !Slimet, bie lIii~Ud1 finb. lB. !Rut biejellillen, roeldle llti~ifl finb, finb 3u; ftiebln. 19. !D1l,ljenifle ift gut, I\lll~ nii~(jm itl. 20. met !J1lllnn, bet 3f)1 ten !tifd) ntild)t, ijl betftl&e, ~et en meinigen gfm\\d)t ~Ilt.

'16 DEKON8TRA.TIVE PRONOUN b e f, b t t, b A'.

EXERCISE 55. '.fSdt 55.

1. Shall you buy those horses that I had yesterday if they 8l lood 1 2. No, I shall buy those that I had the day before yeatel day. 3. The boots that the man made are too small and those tlu the boy made are too large Y 4. It is not always those who hal much money that are happy. 5. Not all those who are poorai discontented. 6. The hat that I now have is good, the one that had yesterday is bad. 7. He who is proud is foolish. 8. Do yo live in the same house in which I lived 1 9. No, I live in the on in which your friend lived. 10. Even those who hated him praise him. 11. The king himself praised the gallant soldier. 12. Tbl is the very same man to whom I sent the ring. 13. I who·spea and vou who hear will soon be with him for whom we weel 14. These books are not the ones that I have bought. 15. Do yo understand all that you read in this book 1 16. We buy only aue

.hats as are good. .17. Those who do not make themselves useti are discontented, and those who are discontented are not happj 18. All those who are oppressed hate their oppressora. 19. Tbl book is the very same one that I had day before yesterday. 20. ·Thl which is neither useful ~r agreeable is not good.

LESSON XXX. &tctfn XXX.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN ner , ble, baG.

1. Besides the various uses of ber, ble, baG alread noted (L. 4. ~8. & 29.), it is used as a demonstrative, answei ing to that, and is frequently best rendered by a persow. pronoun; as,

met ba Ullb Id), Ill!t jinb au" (iBtt.

mer fdlabet nld)t me~t, tel) \~a&e I~n

erfdllagen.

(it !ie&t feinen !Btuber, a&et nid)t beifen .!tlnber •.

!1)1I ()aft melnen !BaU unb ben be" Jtlla&ell, melue ijebet IInb ble bed .\!el)terd, meln !Bud) unb bad bed ®d)iilert1, meine Xifdle nnb b!t bet .!tinbet.

That (man) _Ionder and I (WI are from Eger.

He (that one) will do no mor harm, I have slain him.

He loves his brother, but n( his (that's) children.

You have my ball and the boy' (that of the boy), my pen an the teacher's (that, &c.), m book and the scholar's (tba &c.). my tables and the em dren's (those, &c.)

DECLEN SION OF THE DEMONST. PRONOUN b e r , b I e ,b ",.

Singular. Plural.

I'EM. NEUT. ALL GENDERS.

bie, baB, that; bie, those;

beren, bejfen, of that; beren, of those;

ber, bem, to, for that i benen, to, for thoR

bie, baG, that; bit, those.

101ASO.

N. ber, G. brffcn, D. bem, A. ben,

DEli. PRONOUN bef, bit, bll'. INDEF. PRON. Miln. 77

2. !Dill, and bieft6 ('oitf~ being often contracted to bit') as also tl)tld1~ in connection with the verb [eln, like t6 (L. 24.) may refer to nouns of all genders and in both numbers; as,

met fit ba4? Who is that 1

!l)k4 jinb \Jtanaofen unb ~4 jinb These are Frenchmen and those

3ti1lltnn. are Italians.

Slnb ba" 3~u Wreunbe ? Are those your friends?

IIrldj" flnb bie ldngileu !Jld~te' Which are the longest nights ,

3. The indeclinable pronoun man (like the French on) indicates persons in a general and indefinite manner and is rariously rendered "one", "they" &c.: or, the act;-e form of its verb is translated by our passive; as,

!Ulan fagt, blefe !eute ~aflen "let They say (or it is said) these

CBe1b. people have much money.

- !Ran Il)tffi Ino et iil. It is known where he is .

..

a. !llln is used in the nominative only; when, therefore, an oblique case.is required some other word must be employed; as,

lit InW dnen (not man) nle ~oten. He will never listen to one. !!nan foUte aUe, fogat felue \Jelnbe, One should love all, even one's

liebm. enemies.

!!nan foUte fld! oft liaben. One should bathe one's-self often.

h. A personal pronoun is never used as a substitute for " Miln "; as,

!!Bat man l)ente tliun lann, foUte What one can do to-day, he (or

man (not ee) nld!t aUf motgen one) should not postpone till

l!etfd!lelien. to-morrow.

!Jl4n IOri, nldJt, ","4 man (not et) One does not know what one

111 t1jun l)at. (or he) has to do.

Enacu. 66. cJ.fodt 66.

1. IDe1c1)en ~Ifd! l)aflm ~Ie, ben be' Slmmemauut'l obet ben felUel! hbetf ¥ ~ 3d! l)alie ben be4 Slmmetmann4, bet feine. IBmbn4 lil aacI) In mtluem Slmmtt. 8. 0afIeu ~Ie bit Weber 3l)te4 Wrennbe4 obet bte 3l)m WuunbIR' 4. 3d! l)afle Intber bie melne4 ~eunbe4 nod) ble lIId1let \JmUIbm. 6. oOaben blefe ed1iUn bie IBitdjet be' .tuaflen aber bte be' !!nanut4' 6. flBetben eie In ben .pdufetn bn IBauem obn In bmen bn Jtauf{ente Inol)nen? '1. IDlan linbet mel)t Unftaut aUf ben Wtlbnn nnb flBlefen bet !lmetllanet al. aUf benen bet !l)eutfd!m. 8. IDlan 8L:tubt,1fe Inttben motgen fommen. 9. IDlan fagt. baD biefe 2eute i~re oOdufet I1tdauft l)aben. 1 O. ma~, Ina~ man un~ gejlem 110u bem .!triege fagte, iilnidlt Itla~t. lI.!IDa4 fut IBildler jinb ba4 aUf I~tem :tlfd)e Y Ii. !l)a4 flnb ftan\ojifdle uub ble4 flub uugarifdle. 13. 311 e4 benn lDIrftld! Ina~r, ba; ble @imljfe bet !lmetlfanet fdmeUet fegeln a14 bie bet fhro\)liltY 14. !l)le Oiblfet ullferer ~ttunbe flub gtOret ,\14 bie bet 3~tlgen.

78

AUXILIARIES OF MODE.

EXl:JRCISE 57. '-.fsde 57.

1. Y ou have the books of your friend, and I have those of mine.

2. We have your horse and your- brother's, our wagon and our fatber's, your apples and those of your friends. 3. Do you write witl. our pens or with those of the children 1 4. Are your gloves larger than your cousin's 1 5. I have been told that you have bought a new carria~e, is it true' 6. I have bought two, the captain's and teacher s. 7. These are my books and those are my brother's. 8. That is what I have been told, but I do not believe it. 9. Are the ships of the English better than those of the Dutch 1 "10. It is said that the Americans have better ships than the English, do you believe that it is true ¥ 1~ Is it believed that these people will sell their house ¥ 12. Have you the books of our friends or those of yours Y 13. We have those of ours. 14. What is said of these Hungarian books Y

LESSON XXXI.

lecUn XXXI.

AUXILIARIES OF MODE.

1. .anntn indicates:

a. A possibility dependent on the capabilities of the subject; as,

met !Bogel fann jllegtn. Sle f6nnen eG leld)t t~un.

b. A logical possibility; as,

!nan fann eG fd)on get~an ~a&en. It may have been done already.

3d) !le~e nld)t, e" fonnte tegnen. I am not going, it might rain.

(it fann Unred)t ~aben. He may be wrong.

Obs. Jtonnrn is often used transitively in the se~ of "to understand, to know by heart"; as,

(it fann tllele ~Mfd)e 2lebet. He knows many ~retty songs.

Sle fann engllfd) unb ftanaa~fd!. She understands English aud

French.

IDIOIIS, WITH f 0 n n e n.

3d) fa nn nld)t um~ln au lad)en. I can not help laughing.

3d) fann nld)tG bafCtr, ba~ Id) atm &In. I can not help being poor.

mlaG fannll bu benn bafCttY How can you help itY

2. !Dutfen indicates:

a. A possibility dependent on the will of another; as,

met !Banet barf nid)t ~fd)en. The peasant is not allowed (by

law) to fish.

He who wears not the Lord'. yoke must not adorn himBelt with his cross.

The bird can fiy. You can easily do it.

mlet be~ (;ettn 30d) nld)t tragt, barf fief) mit feinem Jheua nld)t fd)mCtcfen.

A.t1XILUlllE8 OF .ODE.

79

6. ) n the conditional mode, biitfen often indicates a logical possibility; as,

Ii' biitfte ie~t au fv.u [ein. It might (may) now be too late. ~ie !Jlad)welt. biitfte !Bebenfen tta:= Posterity might hesitate to sub-

sen biefe' Utt~ell au unterfebniben. scribe to (approve) this verdict.

c. The infinitive ofbiitfen, preceded by au, is often omitted in -translating; as,

lit bat um <Jdaubni;, fie befud)en He asked (for) permission to (be

au biitfen. at liberty to) visit them.

3. Wlogen indicates: .

a. A possibility dependent on the will of the speaker or

the subject, and is frequently used transitively; as,

!i)u magll ben !Brief lefen. You may read the letter.

3d) mag nldjt ~ier bleiben. I do not wish to remain here.

3d) mag ben mlein nld)t. I do not like (wish for) the wine.

Sie n!ligen uni5 nid)t fe~en. They do not wish to see us.

b. A logical possibility as a concession on the part of the speaker; as,

(it mag eln tteuet \jteunb [eln, He may be a true friend.

ele mogen ei5 get~an ~aben. They may have done it.

Obs. Wlilgen had formerly, and in some parts of Germany still has, the same signification as tonnen; as,

G}taben mag Id) nid)t. 2Utili5 (Luke) 16. 3.

4. SoUm indicates:

a. A necessity dependent on the will of another, or on . moral obligation; as,

!niefe Wutd)t foU enblgen j i~t .paupt This fear shall end; her head

f oU faUen ; ,Id) will \jdebe ~aben. shall fall; I will have peace.

3d) foU In ble etabt ge~en. I am to go to the city .

.ltbtbtt foUen ~rntn. Children should (shall) learn.

b. A logical necessity founded on the assertion of others, in which use foUtn is usually rendered by "it is said", "is or are said to", "it is reported", or by phrases of similar import; as,

Sle foUen fe~t T~Id) [etn,

They are said to be (or, it is said they are) very rich.

~eraog 30~ar.n foU inen 1m G}e$ Duke John is reported to be bltge. wandering in the mountains.

c. @5oUen with the verb to which it belongs, often answers in relative 8~nteBces, to an infinitive preceded by "to"; as,

, (it ",eip niebl WM er t~un fen. He does not know what to do •

.Beise mit wie 111) ei5 mad)en foU. Show me how to do it.

80

AUXILIARIES OF .ODI:.

6. tlDollen indicates:

a. A necessity dependent on the wIll of the subject; 81, (Ie foU fo [ein, Idj roill ee fo ~aben. It shall be so, I will have it 10. ele mellen nlellt ge~en. They will not (do not wish to) go. ~dI mellte eG I~m erfldten, aM ee I was going to explain it to him,

RloUte mid) nid)t ~oren. but he' would not hear-me.

h. A logical necessity dependent on the assertion of tho subject '; as,

(It rolll bid) gef~en ~aben.

•

He insists (will have it) that h. has seen you.

He insists that you are wrong. They are said to be in the city ; the people will have it ttw they have seen them.

6. !lnuffen is the equivalent of "must"; as,

!Bit mullen !!Ue fterben. We must all die. '

met (Senne mup fd)eibm, bet (Som. The shepherd must depart, the

met ift ~In. summer is past.

7. 21lffen signifies "to let", "to permit", "to command", as also "to get or have" (in such phrases as to get or haye a

, thing made or done, in which use it is construed with the infinitive active, with passive signification. L. 35. 6.); as,

~d) lalle I~n fommen. I let him (or cause him to) come.

(it rol!( fie nid)t ge~en laffm. He will not let them go.

8. These verbs all have a complete conjugation. In their translation, therefore, wherever the corresponding English verb is ~efective, the deficiency must he supplied by using lome equivalent word or phrase; as,

~dI mujjte geftetn ge~en. I was obliged to go yesterday.

~d) ~abe nld)t gerooUt, abet 14) ~abe I have not wished to, but I have

gemuUt. been obliged to •

<It witb ge~m fonnen. He will be able to go.

eie roerben ",Ielen rooUen. They will wish to play.

(Ie III beffet atlleltm au I1.1oUen, ale It is better to be willing to work,

atbelten au muffen. than to be obliged to work.

9. The perfect and pluperfect of these auxiliaries, as also ~afen, fe~en and fii~ren when used with other verbs, are formed, not with the past participle, but with the infinitive; as,

~d) ~abe nldJt ge~elt fonnen. I have not been able to go.

ele ~at e~ nldlt t~un mOgen. She has not wished to 00 it.

(It ~at tefm muffen. He has been obliged to read.

mllt ~aben l1e~en biltfm, abet lIid)t We have been at liberty to go.

ge~en rooUen. but have not wished to go.

3d) ~abe I~n finseu ~oten. I have heard him sing.

(it roia, ~Ie ~aben Unted)t.

<Sle foUen in bet <Stabt fein, ble ieute rooUen fie gefe.f)en ~aben.

• AUXILUllIES OF KODE.

81

10. When two infinitives are thus employed, the inversion usual in relative sentences, does not take place; as,

!)no !W<lnn, meld)et ~Qt ge~m mCtf- The man who has been obliged

ffll (not 9~en mulien ~t). to go.

31f1 mei; e", bQ; et mltb fommm I know that he will be able to

fonnm. come.

11. The main verb is often omitted after these auxiliaries; as,

3d) lQnll nld)t me~t. !lIJM moUm blefe 2fllte Y Eiie milliell gleld) fod. 1lB<1" foU bet .pun

..3~t kdumt! m", foU 1111 bott?"

Will 3ilngllng ",oUte aut (stabt ~In.

Buf.

12.

I can (do) no more.

What will these people (do)? You must (go, away immediate.j; .What shall the hat (indicate)? Ye dream! what should I (do)

there I

A young man wished to go (or get) up to the city.

CON1UGATION OF THE IIODE AUXILIARIES

ill) fcutu, bu fannll, n fann,

PRII:BDT TENSII:.

mu~, tDtll,

mu~t, tDitlft,

mu~, tDtll,

mag, magft, mag,

foU, foUft, fou.

IMPERFEOT TENSE.

lcf} lonnte, butfte, mu~te, tlloUte, mocf}te, foUte.

13. The second and third persons singular, and all persons of the plural, are formed as in regular verbs.

EXERCISE 58. ~arBllbt 58. J

1. 9Bet ~rig 111,. lIliU elien, unb IIlIt butjiig Ijl, lIlia trinlen. 9. ~Ie. tenigm, IOeIdJe nid)t" lIlitien, foUen etiOa8 Iernen, 3. IDler franf ijl, foU lIle.

nig elfell. 4. fIDet gefunb &Ielb.n lIliU, mu; ma;iB elfm unb trinfen. 5. IDlet

gut fdllafell lIliU, mu; am !lage tlei;lg arbeiten. 6. IDler nid)t jlei;lg unb nufmerffam fein llliU, fann nicl)t fd)neU Iernen, 7. IDlet einen !Bdeffdltei ... '&en lIliU, mu; llllllHet, !linte unb jJeber ~ciben. 8. ~ie jJreu'oell bet (irbe

fcU man IIlle @elll"litae genie;m unb nld)t Illie taglid)e ®\'flfen. 9 . .!ton.

nm ISle mit fagen lIlo bet l1lrat lIlo~nt? . 10. 3d) lIliU mit 3~nen au I~m ge.

~m. 11. !IDetbm ele morgen mit mit nQd) bet etabt ge~en lonnen!

. Ii. 3d) "'erbe ge~m £Onnen aber Id) Illerbe nldJt ge~en llloUrn, benn Id)

IIlnbt i&ermorgen ge~en mulfen. 13. ~Ie beutjdJe eVrad)e foU fe~t

f4)l1!letlg fein, be,~alb mu; ber Sdjuler bie !Jtege1n nnb 'ole lBelfviele aufmerffaUl lefl'tl. u. IDler blefe Svrad)e Iernen llliU, barf nld)t filul obet lIad)ICiJlg [ein, 15. !I.Jleln mater ~at mldl nle tanaen Ialien, er ~at nle tanim llloUen unb [eine .Rinber ~a&en nie tcmen biltfrn. 16. IDllt Iller. btu &.Ub-fvredlen fonnen, IIlCltn lulr nur j1eijjig fein ltlo([en. 17. IDla' lUoUte bet Jtilufmilllll ~~nen tlerfilufrn ~ 18. 3d) fomtle nidJt8 beli~ltI. ~tn lila" id) faufen lIloUte. 19, (iin guter 2e~ret mil; &tb',Ib ~:lbe1t

4*

t!2 COl\Jl1GATIOl\ OF [e in AND werben.

20. ~Ie Jtlnber wellen !lel'fel nnb Jtltfcl!en, abet fie rannen reine raufen, benu fie ~aben leln <ielb. 21. Jtannll bu mit jene gtc;e JtMne btlngen' 22. !mit fonnen nid)t um~in au lacl!en, obgleicl! wit willen, baj e~ untecIJt Ill. 23. 341 fann nlcl!t8 bafilt, baj Id) ann bin. la4. Jtauu 3~t .pm (L. 68.) !ambet aud) beutfd) Y

EXERCISE 59. )",0" 59.

1. I wished to go with my friend but I could not for I was obliged . to remain at home. 2. He who wishes to be rich or learned must be industrious. 3. Those who will not study cannot learn. 4. I wished to buy good horses but could find none. 5. When shall you be able to write a letter to your friends ~ 6. I shall be able to write one to day, but I shall not wish to write one. 7. Will your friends be obliged to stay in the house this evening Y 8. They will not wish to go out of the house. 9. We have been able to go but we have not wished to go. 10. Have you been obliged to remain here Y 11. We have been at liberty. to go but we have wished to remain. 12. I cannot read for I am unwell. 13. You mustbe industrious if you wish to be healthy and happy. 14. These men are said to be very rich. 15. What shall I do with this money' 16. You may give it to your poor friends. 17. May I read your new books ~ 18. You may read them if you can. 19. You may go to your friend if you wish. 20. I do not wish to go to-day but

I shall wish to go to-morrow. 21. Those boys say they can not help laughing. 22. I shall probably be in the city to-morrow, what shall I buy for you? 23. I can not buy anything, for I have no money, and nobody will lend me any. ~ It is said these children understand German, Italian, French and Dutch.

•

LESSON XXXII.

ItcUn XXXII.

'.

CONJUGATION OF f e in AND I1H r ben.

1. Sdn, "to be" is used as an auxiliary in fonning the perfect, pluperfect, and second future of many active and neuter • verbs; and hence is frequently translated by "to have"; as,

(it III gewtfen. He has been. (lit. he is been). (L. 3U)

(it III gegangen. He has gone. (" he is gone).

ele wat geblieben. She had remained. (" she was remained).

lJDlt finb gewotben. We have become. (" we ard become).

elt werben fd)on gegaltl They will already ( " they will already be

gen fein. have gone. gone.)

311 tt In ben \Y(uj gtfal. Has he fallen into (" is he fallen into the

len Y the river? river ?)

@Slnb un fete ~tellnbe Have our friends (" are our friends DOl

nod) nld)t angdon.. not yet arrived Y yet arrived Y)

lIIen.

...

..

CONIUOATION OF f e i n,

II

2. CONIUOATION OP f e i n,

INJ'lNITIVE.

Pru"at. fein, to be.

Perfect. gelVefen fein, to have been.

PARTICIPLES.

Present. feienb, being

IN D I C AT I V E.

Perfect. geIVefen, been.

Plural.

Singular. ld1tiln, I ~;

'ou tiftl, tho art;

tr ilt, he i; .

paIIISENT TENSE.

IVft flnb, we are; f~t felb, you ~e; fie flnb, they lI.{e.

IJIPIIIIU'ECT TENSE.

IVlt IVllten, we were; f~t IVllttt, you were; fie IVIlt'en, they were.

'id1lVllf, I was ;

'ou lVattl, thou wast; rr IVllf, he was;

ftt; tiin 'ou tiitl tritl

• PEarECT TENSE.

~ E I have };; lVit flnb 'i thou hast ~ i~t' fefb

-g, he has ,J:J fle flnb

} 5' we have } 1:1

i you have i ~ they have ,J:J

PLUPEarECT TENSE.

itt; IVllt: } E I had };; IVft' IVIlt'en bu IVllrfl 'i thou hadst i i~t' IVIlt'et

er IDllr ~ he had ,J:J fle IVllten

} 5' we had} s:i i you had ~ ~ theyhad ,J:J

rlB8T ruTUIlE TENSIII.

fd1lVetbe} , I shaH }. ~ lDit lVetben ; ,we Shall} bu lVittl . ii thou wilt j i~t lDetbet ii you will .8

er mil'b ..... he will fle lDetben .... they will

SECOND ruTUaE TENSE.

idl, metbe} II • I shaH } I lDit mcrben ~ II we ShaH;} j 'ou mitil I:i thou wilt " i~r merbet Ii you will II!

er mil'b ...... he will .a fle merben .. -they will J

fet ('oU), be (thou).

IMPIIIRA TIVB.

feib (i~l'), be (you).

IDIOMS WITH f e in.

'In \l)em III bie !ReI~e au lefen? Whose tum is it to read ,

@lie 1ft an mit. It is mine.

!!JUt ift fe~t faIt; i~m III au \l)atm. I am very cold; he is too warm.

!BUf ill nlit0~l I do not feel well.

-

IDIOKII WITH f e tit.

IDa" Ijl bit?

3d) IUtlfj nld)t IUle mit Ifl. eel gutet!! anut~e".

anit III nl4Jt lUo~1 au anut~e. Cis III ffim Cirnll bamit.

• Cid III ed)abe, bafj er feinem QJtq-

net nld)t gelUad)fen ifl. mad \lfetb III mit nid)t fell 2ilem jinb blefe .Itleibet J

ele Ijll~m elnen @ulben fd)ulblg. mill bu 1m etanbe et!! au t~un ? 341 bin e6 nid)t 1m etanbe.

Wet III ed)ulb batan, bali et nod)

nid)t angefommen Ill' mu f elbjl bill ed)ulb batatt.

(is III eln fold)e6 @efe~ \)ot~anben. Cis 11l1~m barum au t~un.

WOllon III ble !Jttbe Y

mad ijl mit n.d)t.

(is Itll~nen lIeb.

341 bin bit ~etalid) gut.

klfen ele e6 gut [ein, .

Ci6 III mit fo, a16 obld) ee ge~6ri

~dtte.

3d) lUeifj IUle bu bijl. (id fel nun, bafj u. f. IU.

llDa6 fein folI, fd)l1ft jid) lUo~l

What ails you'

I don't know what ails me. Be of good cheer.

I do not feel well (mentally). He is in earnest about it.

It is a pity that he is not equal to his antagonist.

My horse is not for sale.

To whom do these clothes be-

long 1 .

She owes him a florin. Are you able to do it Y I am not able to do it.

Whose fault is it that he has not

yet arrived 1

It is your. own fault.

There is.such a law in existence. That is his object.

What is being spoken on I am satisfied with that. They are glad of it.

I love you heartily.

That's enough of it, leave off. It seems to me as though I had

heard it.

I know you (your ways). Supposing now, that, &c. Whatever is to be, is proper.

8. tlBedmt is used as the auxiliary in forming the futures of verbs; and in this use answers to our auxiliaries, shaU and wiU; as an independent verb, it signifies, to become, "get", grow; as,

ma6 Writer IUltb faIt.

The weather is becoming (get-

ting) cold.

Weare all growing old. What has become of him 'I I have got rid of it.

The raven becomes very old. (The raven lives to a very great age).

®et~en is often followed by the dative with "au", where we use the nominative after become; the subject of ltItfben before the dative is often rendered by the objective; the dative by the nominative; and lVet'Den by "to haoe"; as,

mad !ffiaiict IUltb au (ild. The water becomes ice. ,,!inelnen armen Ulltett~anen mufj My poor subjects must have their

ba. I~dge lUetben". property.'

•

9llit lUerben aile aU.

Wad Ifl aud iljm gelUorben Y ~ bin cd 10d gflUotbcn. '!Oet vtabe IUltb f'~t 'lIt.

CON1UGATlON OF hltfben.

..

4. CON1UGATION OF bHrben •

..

INFINITIVE.

~,ent.

bl!fben, to become.

Perfm. setllotben [ein, to have become.

PARTICIPLES.

Present,

llJerbenb, becoming.

Perf,ct. setllot'bm, become.

INDICATIVE.

Singular.

Plural.

iel} lDerbe, I become;

tlu tnitit, thou becomest ; er tnir'!>, he becomes;

Pa&SII:NT TII:NSE.

tnit lDerbm, we become; i~r tnerbd, you become; fie tnerbm, they become.

DWPEaFECT TENSE.

id1tnutbe or tnarb, I became; 11:1(r tnur'oen, we became; bu tnur'oefl or tn~, thou be- i~r tnurbet, you became; camest;

_ er tnurbe or tnClrb, he became; fie tnurben, they became.

PII:BJ'ECT TENSE.

id1 bin 'ou bifl edit

l t I have } ~lDlrfinb

J thou hast g i~r f tib

a. he has ~ fit finb

}.! we have } ~

i you have g ::D they have ~

PLUPEBFII:CT TII:NSE.

I had } ;~lDir tIlartn } i we had } ~ thou hadst g i~r tnard i you had g

he had ' ~ fit tnatm ::D they had ~

nRST FUTUU Tll:NSE.

I shall } ~ tnit tner'otn} =' we shall } ~

thou wilt 8 i~r tnerbet ~ you will 0

he will II fit tnerben .a they will .8

SECOND J'UTUBII: TENSE.

teli tnet'oe } j! • I shall } ... IDtr IDttbtn }! . we 8h~n } '" ~

tlu ",itit i! thou ~lt jj i~r IDttbet i!You WI~ ~ 3

er \l irb ::. he WIll fie lDerben ::. they will li

IMPERATIVE,

ruerbe (bu), become (thou). Illcrbet (i~r), become (you).

86 EXERCISES ON It e ~ b e'n. IRREGULAR VERBS, &0.

EXERCISE 60. J\ufSdt 60.

1. !Diefer !lJlann, ber je~t fo arm unb eunb 1ft, ift ein fe~r reid)et .pan~ Ireder eel\lefen. 2. <Sinb <Sie je aUf [enem ~o~en !Berge gelllefen Y 3. ~t'C .faifer 30fe~~ ber ,SlUeite lUar ber <So~n ber .fllifetin !lJlatia X~erefla; t'C IUllr ber ~ieb(ing feine8 moUe8, Ilbcr nid)t felnel! .pofe.. 4. ~er lUar bet gefd)hftefte !Reiter In bem .peere be8 ftanaoflfd)en Jt(liferl! Y 6. ~ann flnb <Sie in .pamburg gelUefen Y 6. ~ie lange flnb eie In biefem ~anbe , 7. ®inb eit nie unauftieben unb trauds gel\lefm' 8. ~ann merben lUir reid) fein Y 9. ~ir lUerben aU UlIb IUter unb flnb diet am ,Slele unferel! 2cben8, 1118 un8 angene~m 1ft. 10. ®al! IUlrb aul! bir lUerben, lUenn bu nid)t jlei;lger IUlrji Y 11. 3d) lUerbe llei;iget lUerben, fobalb al8 (L. 63.2.) Id) gefunb lUerbe. 12. !Der ift nid)t gut, ber nidi! fud)t, .Immer belfer AU lUerben. 13. ~anfreid) l1lurbe 1m 31l~r eintllufenb ad)t ~unbert unb adlt unb l)ieraig elne !Re~ublir. 14. (i., lUirb ein ~elPer Xag lUerben, fagte tin alter Jtrie_Her lUenfge etunben l)ot ber <Sd)llld)t au feinem .tameraben. 15. !Da., ~ferb lUurbe gana lUilb unb unbdnbig. 16.!Der Jtranfe feufat aUf feinem ~ager: "lUlU e" benn nie Xag I~erben Y" unb bet Xaglo~ner linter bem !Dtucfe feinet !J(rbeit: "lUirb e" benn nidlt balb utad1t lUerben yu

17. ,,<So~n, ba ~aft bu melnen <Sl'eer! meinem!lltm lUirb er au fd1lUer".

18. !Die !Rei~e ifl an 3~nen, lUatum leftn <Sit nid)t Y

EXERCISE 61. Jl"sdt 61.

1. When were you at your brother's 1 2. Have those people ever been at your house 1 3. Had they been in Berlin before they were in Vienna 1 4. He will be in Magdeburg before you will be in Brunswick. 5. The emperor of Austria was the king of Hungary. 6. How long have you been in this cityY 7. They have been rich, but have become very poor. 8. What has become of your friend 1 9. The weather is becoming very cold. 10. You can become learned if you will be industrious. 11. The young sailor has become healthy again. 12. The weather is becoming warm and the days are becoming long. 13. The scholars in this school have been very idle, but they are now becoming more industrious. 14. I was obliged to wait so long that r became very tired. 15. The son gets rid of his money faster than his father earned it. 16. How much do I owe you 1 17. Whose tum is it to ~ead Y 18. It is your fault if you do not know.

LESSON XXXIII.

Itctilla XXXIII.

IRREGULAR VERBS, OR VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. 1. lrregular verbs are such as do not form their imperfect tense and past participle according to the rules in L. 27.

2. The infinitive of these, as of the regular verbs, ends in en. The imperfect changes the root vowel; and the past participle frequently differs from the infinitive only by the augment S e; as,

1&IlIlGUJ.AJt l'EJtB8 OR ;VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. 87

Infinitive. Imperfect. Past Participle.

fommen, 10 come; 1m fa1ll, I came; gefcmmen, come.

faUen, to fall; 1111 ~el, I fell; gefallen, fallen.

ge~, to give; Iel) gab, I gave; grgeben, given.

fe~en, to' see ; lei) faij, I saw ; gefe~en, seen.

laufen, to run ; ht) lief, I ran ; geillufen, run.

3. In some, the root vowel is found to be different in t ach of the three parts; as,

ge~tn to go ; 1m glng, I went; gtga11gen, gone.

fvremen, to speak; idJ fl'rad:), I spoke; gefvromen, spoken.

fingen, to Sll.l~; 1m fang, I sang; {lefungeu, sung.

fvtlngen, to sprmg ; Iii) fvrang, I sprang j gefvrungtn, sprung.

4. In others, the root vowel of the imperfect tense and the second participle is the same; as, flimmen, to climb; 1m flo mm, I climbed j tiemtn, to smell; iei) rom, I smelled;

treiben, to drive; let) trieb, I drove;

fiIJl\leUen, to swell; Iel) fel)l\loU, I swelled;

grflommen, climbed. grroet)en, smelled. getrieben, driven. gefet)l\loUen, swelled or

swollen.

5. Some change the radical vowel, and also' add the terminations common to regular verbs j as,

bring en, to carry j id) bramte, I carried; gebrad)t, carried.

henfen, to think; Iel) bamte, I thought; gebaei)t, thought.

renben, to send j iel) fanbte, I sent; gef(1nbt, sent.

!Iliffen, to know; Id) I\lujjte, I knew; gel\lujit, known.

6. The present tense forms the different persons like the regular verbs, except in the second and third persons singular of about sixty verbs, where the root vowel is changed, or if capable of it, assumes the Umlaut; as,

iel) gebe, I give; iel) faile, I fall j

bu gibjt, or glebjt, hou bu faUll, thou fallest ; givest;

er gibt, or giebt, he et raUt, he falls;

gives; .

7. In the imperfect, the second and third persons are regularly formed from the first; as,

S e~ en.

roir gingen, we went, i~r ginget, you went; . fie gingm, they went.

S e ben.-

Id) g(1[), I gave j lt1it gaben, we 'gave;

bu gabll, thou gavest j il)t gabet, you gave;

er gab, he gave j fie gabm, they gave.

Id) (efe, I read;

bu lief ell, thou readest j

et liell, he reads.

Iel) nlng, I went;

bu {lingll, thou wentst ; er glng, he went j

88 BXBRCISES ON IRREGULAR VERBS, .0.

8. For complete alphabetical List of Irregular verbs see

page 178. ~.,.

EXERCISE 62. &\urSI" 62.

1. mlet badt ba" !Btob Y 2. ~et ~olbat liirgt jid), \\leit bu bat9 be> ~e~l~. 3. (it bla~ ba" !IDalb~otn. 4. ~er !Bauer bdd)t ben .panf uub

.tijd)t ben mlei~en. 5. !Die @See(e em~fiingt (iinbriide tlon 14upen. 6. ~1lI @ute em~lie~U ftd) felb~. 7. ~et !nann fa~d aUf bem mlasen. 8. !I)e~ @Sd)nee fliUt. 9. ~et .lbabe fangt ble mogeI. 10. ~et @Solbat fid1t. 11. (it jild)t ftd) elnen .put. 12. ~et .od)t9 frlpt bat! (jt~ Illlb. fduf! UBajfet. 13. ~at! .ltinb ipt !Btob unb trln!t lInUd). 14. <it !libt mit bill mum, lUeld)e8 mit am bellen sefliUt (L. 50. 2). 15. !I)et !I)ad)' grdllt lid) eln 20cb. 16. (it ~alt ba" lIlferb. 11. ~et .put ~angt an bem !ng, gel. 18. (it laufl unb (lipt ble anbem aud) (aufen. 19. @Sie tlell14t !Bum. 20. @Sie mlpt (or mitre!) ba8 !tudJ. 21. (it nlmmt meln !Bulfl. 22'. !IDatum fd}ilt et Y 23. ~et ofjunb fcb(aft, unb bet .ltnalie fd)lIigt L !ttommeI. 24. ~et @Sd)nee fd)milat, ble JtnQ"~e fdJ\\lIUt. 25. mia, ~Il bu 1 \\lie !pricbt er Y 26. ~Ie !Biene Ilid)t, bet ~ieb jlie~U, bet .ltranfe ftitbt. 27. (it ttligt fd)one .ltleibet; er ttlfft Immet bQI1 Sid. 28. "<Ii ttltt melne !ReUgion in ben @Staub". 29. ~a8 !Biet tletbltbt. 30. ~ uetgipt, \\lal1 fie fvtidJt. 31. ~a8 @ta" \\lad)jl. 32. @Sle \\lelp nldlt, \\lM jie \\lUI. 33. (it \\lirf! elnen @Stein. 34. 3d) \\lei;, \\la' et mit tin< f~tid)t.

EXERCISE 63. &\arSllbt 63.

1. I do not know who is throwing the stones. 2. Does she speak German 1 3. He does not forget what he reads. 4. The stream swells when the snow melts. 5. The thief steals the shoes . that he wears. 6., The bee stings and dies. 7. The soldier is beating the drum. 8. The bird sleeps on the tree. 9. She scolds because he takes her book. 10. The carpenter is measuring the room. 11. The boy runs and lets the dog run too. 12. Who is holding my horse 1 13. Where is the cloak hanging 1 14. The man that is braiding hats gives us a book which pleases us. 15. Who is digging this hole 1 16. Why does the soldier fight Y 17. What is this boy eating 1 18. What animal eats grass ~ 19. What does the horse drink ~ 20. The tree is falling. 21. Who is catching the birds-I 22. How does the soul receive impressions 1 23. Who . thrashes the wheat and breaks the hemp 1 24. Why dost thou conceal thyself'! 25. What does he command 1 26. Who is riding' on your wagon 1 27. My friend recom~nds me to you.

EXERCISE 6~. &\ahllbt 64. '

1. ~et ofjunb bip ben ~ieb. 2. ~et ~ft btad1. 3. ~et .ltaufmann ~ treg [einen .ltlluben. 4. lit emvfa~l mid) elnem !I.llanne, bet mid} f~t fteullblidJ em~~ng. 5. 3d) bIieb ben gallaen !tag. 6. @Sle ergrlffen felne .plinbe. 7. @Sie erfd)raden, al" et etfd)len, unb ble furcbtliClte @Stimme erjdtcll, 8. (it lid in ben \j(up nnb ertranf. 9. @Sie ajen ble V{cvftl, ble fie tla~len. 10. !IDit fubren aUf bet (iifenba~n. 11. @Sir. linsen ble mogel, \\le!d)e au~ ben !Jle~etn jloStn. 12. ~ie ~dbaten fell)ten nldlt

BXERCISEB ON IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 89

tllllfer, fonbetn flo~ell. 13. ~elne llhiiber fra~ bQ8 SdJroert, roo bae ~Iul In StTomen flo," 14. &r gebol une AU ge~en, aliet roeU e8 Ulle ~ier ge. ~el, fl) (L. 39. 2.) blieben roir. 15. &t gab mir ba8 @elb unb 9iull. 16. «<'r gellufj ("ngfam. .7. ®ir gm~ffm geilern fe~r roenig. 18. ~toelll'lIIn me~r aI~ id) Iledor. 19. ~r gofj ben ®eln in ba~ @(a~. 2{). @3ie glid)en I~relt ~teunben (L. 50. 2). 21. ~ie 8ru&en einen tiefen @rabeu. 2l. <ir ~o& felnen @3t~jf unb ~ieb und) mir. 23. <it ~Iefj jie fommen, abet lie famen nld)t. 24. <it ~ilIf u1l8, obgleld) ee une nid)t fannle. 25. !IDit lafen ba8 !Bud), baG ee un~ Iie~. 26. ~ie @3dJilbfrote frocb, bet .pafe lief. 27. Sie Iagell aUf i~ren !Betten unb litten. 2B. ~ie !Bofe: lUid)ter logen, lie nn~mell melnen !!Dagen unb nannten I~n I~r <iigenl~um. 29. tit "rleG felne ®aan unb fiet~ .1II.fie au faufen. 30. (it fap ullb fdJrieb ben ganaen ~ag. 31. ~,,8 JtI\b~anb unb fd)rle. 32. ~et Sdlllee fcbmola, bn @3tTom fdJrooU. 33. @3ie nfen unb fangen j elner fd)lIlamm .tib bn anbere fant. 34. Sie fdJIugen n, rod~renb er fdJlief. 35. <ir rief mid) unb fd)a(t, roeU idJ fein !llferb rilt. 36. Sle fd)ien traurlg. 37. <it fd)rltt ~erau~ unb fd)Iofj ble ~~itre. 3B. <ir ilieg au] ben !Berg. 39. eie j'lanben, bi~ fie jiarben. 40. <ir ilritt mit i~nen unb tTleb fie nm1 bem ~elbe. 41. Sie traten In bae (;au8 unb llerfd)lIlanbell. 42. <it Ilers"p, IIlU et Ilerj\lrad). 43. (it tra] ba~ Siel. 44. <i~ lIlud)~ fd)neU. 45. <ir roufd) ben SaIat. 46. <it \\lufjte, bali idj ben @3l'eer roarf. 47. (it a~9 feln e~l11ert Ull~nroan9 fie auge~en.

EXERCISE 65.

~.r8Ilbt 65.

1. The b~ches broke and the boys fell. 2. The dogs bit the

boys that 1St?11 the apples. 3. The man to whom you recommended - me, cheated me. 4. We did not remain long, fur they did not receive us kindly. 5. The boy was frightened and seized my hand. 6. We called him but he did not appear. 7. Do you ride on the wagon Y B. The soldiers ate bread and drank wine, and their horses ate hay and drank water. 9. Our soldiers fought gallantly, and those of our enemy fled. 10. The birds flew out of the cage but the boys caught them again. 10. Tears flowed from his eyes. 11. It did not please us there. and we did not remain long. 12. They commanded us to go to the city, but we did not go, for they gave us no money. 13. Did your friends recover ¥ 14. We won less than our friends lost. 15. They poured the wine into the glasses. 16. They saw the horse and raised their hands. 17. Why were they digging that ditch ¥ 18. I knew him because he resembled his brother who came to us while we were reading the books which you lent us. 19. He struck at them because they drank so much and sang so loud. 20. We crept before we walked. 21. The boys whistled and the dogs ran. 22. We took the books that lay on the table: 23. Did you call him a villain 1 24. We knew that they lied. 25. We sat around the table and wrote and they stood around the stove. 26. He rode the horse and drove the oxen. 17. They praised their horse and advised us to buy it. 28.· Why did they seem so sad ¥ 29. He scolded me because I slept so loDg. 30. They threw their spears and drew their swords. 31. Did

•

~o EXEROISES ON IRREGULAR VERY' ~C.

32. Did they hit the mark' 1l10IVlIl:lotJ;J~l •• ·,J.lla the trees grow rapidly' they quarrel with us! melted.

J\afS8bt 66.

~. <it ~at um' &ettosm. 3. (it an un~ sebad!t. 6. .pall bu ben rr eu mDlIIIl em~fangen, abet !nlemQnb nte eln f old)e" @efi't~l em~funben.

9. <it ~at ben \'l))fel Ststtien j ~QI fie sefunben j fie ~.9;-<Ocbten.

12. <it ~at mit sege&en.

~a&en nld!t" Bene : 16. 9IlQ'

~at er gemonnen Y 16. !IDeln In ba" @la" gegolftn'! 17. QRn

flat bleftt! 2od) gegta&tn Y 18. ~at ba" !llf~tb ge~alten'. 19. <it ~at

. unt! ge~olfen. 20. <it ~at un' gelannt. 21. @ile ~at mit tin ~ud! 9t1 lle~en, unb Id! ~abe e. gdefen. 22. ~Ie Ijebem ~aben aUf bem Xlfd)e 9elcgen •.. ~~. <it ~at nld!t gelogen. ~4. ~et !l1UiUet ~at ba~ @ettelbe gt. meifen '1QlO gema~len. 26. !nle ~abe Id! blefe @efa~ten semleben. 26. lit ~at un" ~iebt genannt, well wit felne ~i'td)et genommen ~abm. 27. !ID1lI Tum ~at ef ge~fijfen y 2B. @ile ~aben I~te !IDaaren ge~rlefm. ~9. lit ~at fid) (L.50. 7.) ble \'lugen gerte&en. 30. <it ~at fie gerufen. 31. Qillll rum ~ajl bu un" gefd)oUen Y 32. <it ~atte ba~ @id!af gefd!oten. 33. (It ~at ben !Batell gefd)oifen unb gefd)unben. 34. @ile ~atten au lange gt< fdllafen. 36 . .pajl bu ble !InetTet gefd!lijfen? 36. !IDlt ~aben bie X~ilren gefd!lotTen. 37 . .pat et ba" !Brob gefd)nitten? 38. 3d) ~atte gefd)rieben

. unb fie ~aben gefd)rieen. 39. @iie ~at et! gefd}l1.1oten. 40. !IDlt ~aben I~n gefe~en. 41. .pat ee ba" 21eb fd)on gefungen 1 42. <it ~at elnt @itunbe gefeifen. 43. <it ~at ba" .pol! gef))alten. 44 . .paben fie ble !IDoUe

, geIPonnen? 46. !IDa" fie gefvrod)en ~at, ~at I~n gejlod)en. 46. mer !Inann, bet ba gejlanben ~atte, ~at meln !llfetb gejlo~len. 47. Sit ~abt1l lange genug geflritten. roM ~at ee get~an ? 4B. !IDarum ~at er bltfen .put getragen? 49. <ir ~at ba" ,Siel gettojfen. 50. .pall bu nle !lMn gtirnn!en 1 61. 3d) ~abe Ilergejfen. 52. !IDa" ~at er uetloten? 63. Ii. ~at I~n uerbrojfen. 54 • .pat er une uel'!le~en? 55. <it ~at ba. !tudl gelllo&en unb gelllafdJen j ~at et elnen @iteln gelllorfen? 56. <it ~atte tlnen .!trana fill' fie gerounben. 57 • .patte er nldJt~ Ilon bet Sad}e gtlllu;t¥ 58. Sie ~atten i~te Sd)llledet geaogen. 69. Sle ~aben un~ gtaroungell ~Iet au &lei&eu.

EXERCISE 67. J\UfS8bt 67.

1 He has beaten the dog that has bitten him. 2. I have often thought of him, 3. Have you recommended this book to us 1 4. Have you threshed the wheat Y 5. They have always received us kindly. O. Have you ever experienced such a feeling? 7. The boys have eaten the bread and drank the beer. 8. The dogs have eaten the meat and drank the water. 9. They have caught their horses. 10. What have you found 1 11. Why have the soldiers fought Y 12 I have shot a large bird. 13. Have you seen. the

· USE OF THE AUXILIARIES ~ a & en AND f e l n. 91

boob that I have read? 14. Into which glass have you poured .the wine ~ 15. Why have they dug this hole 1 16. Who has held my horse Y 17, Have they helped us Y 18, Have my books lain on your table? 19. Has anybody lied? 20. Who has ground the wheat? 21. Have you measured the cloth? 22. Has he avoided the danger I 23. Have they called him a villain? 24. Who haa taken my pen? 25, He has called me but he has not scolded me. 26. Who has sharpened your knife 1 27. Have you locked the doors Y 28. Who has cut the bread? 29. Had you written him a letter? 30. Have you ever sung this song? 31. Have you sat longer than they have stood? 32. I have spun the wool and he has split the wood. 33. The bees have stung the horse. 34. Has anybody stolen anything? 35. He had not spoken at all. 36. Why have they quarreled 1 37. Who has worn the hat? 38. What have y011 lost ? 39. Who has thr,pwn tho stones 1 40. Why have they drawn their swords? 41. Have you washed the cloth that he has woven 1 42. It vexes him that he has lost his money. 43. Have you forgotten what you have promised me 1 44. Why have you slept so long? 45. Has anyone compelled you to go 1 46. Who has whistled Y 47. Have yOll_praised the goods Y 48. Have you ever known such a man ? 49. He has written, and they have spoken.

LESSON XXXIV. It c t i. n XXXIV.

USE OF THE AUXILIARIES ~ ali e a AND f e i n.

1 . .oaben is used as the auxiliary of all transitive, reflexive (L. 43.) and impersonal (L. 44.) verbs, as also of the verbs of m~ (L. 31); and of all objective verbs that govern the genitive (L. 49.) and dative (L. 50.). Except llegegnen, folo 8m and bleicI,m (see 2.).

2. Intransitive verbs iruY,cating direcfion from or towards a place or an object, or a change from one condition to another, as also &lei&ev, lieeegnen, folgrn and bldcI,en, require the auxiliary fein, which in this use, should of course be rendered by "to have"; as, Slnb lie fellen gegangen ?

!l>n anne .!babe 1ft RcfaUen.

3ft er benn IIOd) nldJt gefommen? !l>et megd 1ft weg gejlogtn.

(Sie linb In ba8 \jelb geaogen.

It 1ft na~ ~metifa geteift.

it~ltb in'8 .pau8 gtgangen fein. lit Wat na~ bet <5tabt geeilt.

€Sit jiub Cluf ba8 2anb getitten.

Have (are) they already gone? The poor boy has (is) fallen. Has (is) he then not yet come? The bird has (is) flown away. They have marched into the field. He has (is) gone (traveled) to

America.

He will have (be) gone into the house.

He had (was) hastened to the city. They have ridden into the country.

92 .p abe nAND f e l n AS AUXILIARIES.

8. When the following verbs do not express direction from or towards a place they require the auxiliary ~abrn j namely eifen, fIif~en, finlen, jag en, fIettftn, ftied)en, lan'oert, faufen, quetlen, teifen, relten, rennen, [egeln, fd)iffen, fd]llJimmrn, f~tingen, fto~en, treiben, llJanbem; as,

mJarum ~(\Il bu fo geeilt 1 Why have you hastened 80 ~

.pall bu nid)t ~eute gedttell Y Have you not ridden to-day?

®ie ~aben nie!)t "iel geteill. They have not traveled much.

Some neuter verbs; as, Ilegen, tlven, fte~en, are sometimes used with the auxiliary [eln; as,

.po~er mat feille !D1ae!)t nie gellalts His power never had stood

bell. higher.

EXERCISE 68. J\afSdt 68.

1. (It III elltfd)Iafen. 2. (lr III UII' entrcnnen, 3. mJle lange III rr gebUeben Y 4. ®ie jillb nad) bet ~tabt gefil~ren. 6. ~et !D1ann III 9" fallen. 6. ~et mogd ill ge~ogen. 7. ~a' mJafl'e,t III ilbet bill Wtlb 9" jlofl'ell. 8. ~et !plan illsdullgen. 9. ~et .ltllabe III genefen. 10. mJd III gefd)e~en 1 11. (I, ill au' bet (ltbe geftoe!)en. 12. ~et .pun~ ill lIad) bem mJalb gelaufen. 13. ma' Urt!etlle~mell III ml~Iungen. 14. mat1 !l1lafl'er III au' bem ~elfell ge~ofl'en. 16. (it ill nile!) bet ®tilbt geritten. 16. (It Wilt In bal1 .flau' gefd)tidJen. 17. Cit war ilbet ben @raben ge.< f"rungell. 18. ®ie l\laren au' bem ®dJlojj getreten. 19. ~et leete XcII War !,)erfd)ollell. 20. ~er maum ill fe~t fd)lIeU gewadJfen. 21. ~itt1 .paul1 wltb gefallen [eln, 22. ®Ie Werben gefommen fein. 23. Cit wat aUf ben !D1illl gefIettert. 24. ~et Jtnabe III ilber ben ~u; gefd)wommen. 25. (linet Wilr unl1 gefolgt, unb bet ~llbm Wat un' begegnet. 26. !ret ®dJnee III gefe!)molaen unb ble ~lifl'e jinb gefdJwoUen. 27. ~ile D&jllil fdJllell gmlf!. 28. ~Ie ®olbnten jinb In ba' ~elb geaosen.29. Cit !Dar nae!) ber ®tabt geellt. .

EXERCISE 69. ~"S.h 69.

1. Have you remained long eriough?l Who has gone to the city 1 3. Do you know what has happened Y 4. The boy has sprung across the ditch. 5. Our plan has not succeeded. . e. The children had hastened into the house. 7. Has the snow melted! 8. The hunters had climbed upon the trees. 9. Our soldiers had fled and the enemy ~d come into our country. 10. He has ridden (on horseback) to the forest, and she has ridden (in a carriage) to the city. 11. The patient h;.,ivered. 12. Has he fallen

asleep ¥ 13. How have they -4Is d us? 14. Our friend has

fallen out of the wagon. 15. . . ng birds have flown out of

the nest. 16. The worms have cl'It'W'led out of the earth. 17. The horse has run out of the stable. 18. The apples had ripened. 19. The water will have flowed into the house. 20, w_!t_y have you followed us Y 21. Have you met VOItr friends' ii. He DJA1

already have gone. .

J

·t~, LESSON XXXV. .. tl XXXV

.•• .1 ~tC lID •

1;-1 INFINITIVE.

1. When the infinitive is preceded by an auxiliary or by anyone of the following words, the particle au is omitted;

~ijen,* to bid; ~elfm, to help; le~ten, to teach;

lemen, to learn; ~attn, to hear; fe~en, to see; fii~len, to feel; macf1en, to make; as,

tir [etnt ling en, unb le~ri mid! f\lle- He learns to sing, and teachea

len. me to play.

6ie ~ie,en Ulle ge~en. They told us to go.

2. After the following verbs the infinitive is best translated by our present participle:

f,,~ttit, to ride (in a vehicle); fii~ten, to conduct; fin'ilen, to find; triten, to ride (on horseback); tileitien, to remain; ~atien, to have; 8e~en, to walk; lleijjen ;* [ein, to be; as, (it bUef) pe~en unb Id! ginS fffdjen. He continued standing (to stand)

and I went a fishing (to fish). (linn flibri filaalrm, unb bet In. One rides (goes riding) in a car-

bere trltet f\laalren.t riage ana the other on horseback.

She had a clock standing in the

house.

It is expensive living in England. Do you call that working 1

Has he gone (in order) to sleep 1 i, e. to bed 1

~. The infinitive (usually preceded by. the article, or a pronoun) is used as a neuter noun and IS rendered by our present participle used substantively; as,

. ~ae 2itgen 1ft elll ~after. Lying is a vice.

\Jort mit beinem !llfa~len. Away withlour boasting.

,.~u ~d1nlett an melnet {\Infen! Thou swor upon my left, what

lI)ae foll beln ~eltte" lBlinfen yl~ means thy cheerful gle~ng1

USB OJ' THB JNJ'tNJTIVE.

03

fiiie ~aUe elne IDanb~r 1m .oaufe

tleIJen.

(ill III t~euer le&en In Cinglanb. .pei,.. bal! atbelien ?

3ft er fd!lafen gtgangen"

.) ".pel;en" when Intransitive i. rendered by the pa .. iv~ of "tt) e~II". .. to '18m."; or by the aub8lllntlve .. name", with the verb "t.o be:'; as, er ~el6t .!tad, ee i s " ealled", (or "named", or hi. "name iB") Charle •. !IIlle bel~t b41 aUf :Deutflil1 or, lI)ie ~ei6t baS im ~eutfc(!en 1 Wbat i. that "called" in German 1

tl ~"a!iren I. used cbiefly with Qf~en, fabten, reiten, and fUbren, and denote. :.Im.t the action performed is for exercise, or pleasure; ~

"'r reitet frbr oft, abef ef niter nle H. rides very often, but he never riae. ror

r"~Aiml. pleasure.

~d! Rebr aUf X ase fpaAireu, I go walking (take a walk) every day,

tillr mat\lttll ciuell ~palirB"uc. We took (made) a walk.

. .,.

~ ....

USE OP THB INP1NITIVE.

(it III bt' !Daden' mlibe. He is tired of (the) waiting.

(it benft nur an (ilien ullb 'trlnfen. He thinks only of eating and drinking.

4. The infinitive (generally without aU) often stands as the subject, or object of a verb; as,

@lterben III nld)t'. bodl {eben unb To die is nothing, but to live and

, IIldlt fe~en. bae III eln Ungllid. not see that is a misfortune .

.eanbeln Illlelcljt. benfen fdllllef. To act is easy, to think difficult.

6. The infinitive with au follows the particles iUlftQtt and

o~nf; as~ f,

(it !\lIeU. anjlatt au lefen. He plays instead of reading (to

. read).

@lie ~nb fran!. o~ne e' au Illiffen. Theyaresickwithoutknowingi~

~u ~inbetll mlclj, au fd)niben. You keep me from writing.

6. The infinitive active is often used in a passive sense'; as, llliefee .eau' III AU uetmlet~en. unb This house is to let, and tht'

fenee III au uedaufen. one is to be sold (to sell). .

", III felne Selt au lIedlmn. There is no time to be lost (to

lose).

Where is this book to be bad , He is getting a hat made. They caused him to be punished

!IDo III blefe, ~ud) au ~a&en Y (ir liifjt elnen .eut macljen. !nan lIefj I~n &efltafen.

7. Um before the infinitive signifies "in order", but is frequently omitted in translating; as,

(ir III nad) ~eutfd)lanb gereifl, um He has gone to Germany (in

ble @I\lrad)e au Iernen, order) to learn the language.

(ir Illat AU fcljlllaclj, um ble !lr&elt au He was too weak to fulish the

uoUenben. work.

8. ®Ijfen often stands in the sense of "to know how", "to be able", before an infinitive; as,

(ir Illeifj fid) au .,elfen. .He knows how to help bimIJel£

, EXERCISE 70. "lIf08h 70.

1. .eelfjen @lie I~n ge~en obet bleiben ! 2. (irner le~rt mlclj fiana6fifdl f\lred)en. unb bet anbm lernt e' lefen. 3. mle !lbld)tlgall Illltb tlcb &alb ~oren (alfen. 4. ~iefe !natrofen I"etbcn morgen ober Ii&etmotgen flfdlen ge~en. 5. mer aUe !Ballet ~at uie! guten alien !IDeln 1m .lteUet lIfStn. 6. !Befe~len III leid)t. ge~ord)en fd)lllet. 7. 3d) lIebe ba' 2efen. abet illl ~alie ba' @ld)teiben. 8. !IDlr finb eure' $ra~len' unb @ld)llla~en' ~eralldJ mlibe. 9. !IDeld)e Urfad)e ~at fie !rautlg au fein ¥ 10. 3c1j ~a&e llIebet Selt nod) 2ull feln @llngen au ~oren. 11. 3ebet gute 6d)Ii(et IlItl, llIann ble mel~e an I~m ill au Iejen, 12. (iln fo a(&erne" ~drd)en Ifl nlcljt I~ !llanben. 13. @lie lalien I~ren !Beblenten I~r Sinlmer fegeit"' 14. ~tt !JUdlter lie; ben !Ilerbl'cd)et Ind @efangnijj I!)elfen. J 4. ~ebe um ~ lernen. Ullb Ierne um AU le:·en .. 15. (it roeifj au {eben unb pd) bQ~ ~e&,.rjlllgent~m

t.

PARTICIPLES AND JIlPEIUTll'£.

111 mad!m. 16. !)fe .tfnbn flnll f\la&frcn gri'a~tm, uall bl ~IUtt flab f~Q!iTtn gnfttrn. 17. (if Iflllfcben !ltgangm, anflatt AU j\I. ftlI, 18. lSie ~nb in ble lSd)ule gegangcll um lingli; dJ &U Iernen,

EXERCISE 71. "afS8bt 71.

1. Who taught you to speak German' 2. I le~ rned to speak .it in Germany 3. This stupid boy remained .sitttng the whole evening. 4. The man had a small table standing beside his bed. S. We shall not have time to see our friends this evening, 6. My mother taught me to sing and my brother teaches me tel play. 7. When shall you go a fishing, to-morrow, or day after to-morrow 1 8. Why have our friends. been to the city without visiting us? 9. They went to their cousins instead of coming to us. 10. I am tired of his singing. U. They have books enough but not time to read them. 12. These horses are to be sold. . 13. This man has something to say to your friend. 14. The captain is getting a new coat made. 15. The general caused the soldier to be thrown into prison. 16. This man's conduct is not to be praised. 17. This sill! s·.ory is not to be believed. 18. Is it not your turn to read 1

19 We must go immediately, there is no time to lose. .

LESSON XXXVI.

Stelln XXXVI.

PARTICIPLES AND IMPERATIVE.

I. The present participle governs the same case as the verb from which it is derived, and always follows its object; as,

mie .ponlg fammelnbe :!Blme. The honey-gathering bee.

mein bid) lIe&enbet :!Brobet. Thy (thee) loving brother.

2. The present participle is used predicatively only when it rejects its participial character and is used simply as an adjective; as,

IDle .pf.e l1lar btiufrnb. The heat was.pppressive.

IDa' 21eb 1ft relAenb. The song is cli~

a. After the verb lommen, the second participle is used in some phrases, where in English the first is employed; as, .peulenb fommt bn @itutm ge~ogcn. Howling the storm comes 111 ing

. . (flown).

4. The word 9t~en, 1D some phrases with the second participle of l)efUtten, is not translated; as,

:net !IDein l1litb Iledoten ge~en. The wine will be (lit. "go") lost.

'Il'" (Melb hllletlmn gcgllngen. Themoney is (gone) lost.

6. The past participle IS sometimes used fS the imII01'&tive; as,

P~:aTICIPLEII ~ND IIIP£lU.TIVt:

!nldlt fo Iaut gejptod}en. Do not ~lso loud.

ijlel;lg geat&eltet. Labor diligently.

6. There is a third future participle formed only from tian sitive verbs by adding b to the infinitive preceded.py au: it aI ways has a passive signification and implies necesSi,.ty or obli·

gation; as, ,

(it III ein au lo&enbei !!.nann. - He is a man who should be

praised.

The to-be-feared danger.

The house (which is) to be built.

IDle au furd}tmbe GJefa~t. IDa' au &auenbe .p~.

IMPERATIVE.

7. When the second person of the imperative is used, the subject is generally omitted; when, however, the third is used, the subject is expressed; as,

.!tad, &dttge mlr brln !Bud). Charles, bring me your book. '

.!tinbet, ge~t In ba' .pau'. Children, go mto the house .

.Rad, &ringen ele mit 3~r !Bud). Charles, bring me your book.

@Sd)icfe et bae lPfetb motgen. Send the horse to-morrow.

@So fei ee, fagte er, So be it (so let it be), said he.

8. The present indicative, and the auxiliary foUen are sometimes used with the force of the imperative ; as,

IDu madlfl tmmee ~nlla1t unb &Ifl Be constantly making prepare-

nlemal, fettlg. tions and never be ready.

3bt fd)weigt, &Ie man eud) antuft. Keep silence till you are called upon.

Do it yourself.

Let John come (cause John to come).

9. ,,~abutdi, ba~" before a finite verb often answers to

"by" before. a present participle; as, •

IDlan fd)abet eud) babutd), ba; man You ~e injured by being praised.

eud) au fe~r 10M. too much. ,

I,iterally.you are thereby injured, that you are too much praised.

EXERCISE 72. ,;llfalt1Jt 72.

1. IDer &taufeube !!Dlub trei&t bae fd)wanfenbe @Sd)11f burd) ble fd}a., menben !!Dellen. 2. IDott fommt eln !mann In tlol1er .pall gelaufen. 3. ~ aIte !mann fd)rle& mit aittetnber .panb. 4. (it reUet gefdlll)lnb, unb ~dll In bem ~rm bile feufaellbe .ltinb. 5. @So fel ee, f~rldlt Illbredjt mit botll nerubem ~aut. 6. !!De.ineub rle] bet au bemltlelbenbe aHe !lnalln: ,,!lIMn eo~nifl etu au &eflrafenbet !ller&red)et". 7. IDet ldd)elllbe ijrit~lIng tr. Illedt ble fd)lafenben !Blumeu. 8. IDLe brennenbe @Sonue fd)milat ben glan' aeuben @;id)nee. 9. 3C)r !Brub'er ifl ein au &eueibeubet !menfd). 10. IDer fiI~ne ~aud)et Illirft fid! In 'Ole btilufenbe ij(ut~. 11. !Brluge mit melueR IDlilldei uub meine ~anbfd)u~e. 12. @Sd)lden Sit 3~ten ~ebtentea III

mu fe1&il foUfl ee t~un. mrr 30~ann foU rommen.

.8'£l'~RAIJLE COMPOUND VERBS.

,s. "Uub feud)tub l.1g im, \\lIt eln (5tttbtllbn, Attltetm untet I~m eblag." 14. "~Il iibetnimmft bie filllulfd)tn lReglmentn, mlld)fl !lnftlllt unb bift niemlllt1 fedig, unb "tiben lie bleb, gegeu mldll" , (L. 39. 2.) fllgtl bu ia, uub bltibft gefeffelt fte~n.'·

EXERCISE 73. Jhf,lh 73

he falling snow covers~e fi . 2. The horse COJDM

~,the bird comes llyi j e the trembling old man a

4. My friend is a very QIir • 6. I hear the singing

md the bleating sheep. 6. Th~miling spring brings us ul flowers. 7. So be it, said th~\i"ng, smiling. 8. He has eping child in his arm. 9. The burning sup. drives the lowtle into the forest. 10. The foaming wave rues over the ng ship. 11. The snow melts before the burning SUD. standing tree is more beautifukthan a fallen one. 13. The husbandman sees with joy .the swelling buds. 14. Do not ) loud. 15. Who is the most -leamed man in Europe' lese travelers call-themselves traveling artists. 17. He II them by treating them kindly.

• ESSON XXXVII.

&utin XXXVII .

COMPOUND VERBS. SEPA.RA.BLE. ,

rhe particles ali, en, auf, au~, liel, bll or bar, eiR, ~, ~9m, 'f1eim, ~er, ~In, in, mit, naefl, nleber, bor, Illeg, 3u, (and their compounds, L. 38.), are often compounded ems; and as they may stand apart from the verb, they lIed separable particles."

n compound tenses, formed from the infinitive and an ry, and in subordinate sentences, the particle is placed the verb; as,

, balb Ilnfommen.

llfen au"ge~en. .

: ben Stein Iluroe&en f ffl ~eim ge~eu.

teu i~n uld)t lluf~lllten. ; uld)t elnfd)lllfen.

) e", bet mid) Iluf~lilt. ofe, \\leit (5ie (lU6ge~en.

kaudg, lDeit ee bie !Blume ld).

e ~iet, e~e tt Ilufftaub.

He will soon arrive. We must go out.

Can he lift up the iltone1 You are at liberty to go home. You should not detain him.

He does not wish to go to sleep. It is you who detain me.

He is angry because you go out. She is sad because he broke off

the flower.

I was here before he got up,

Uke manner are used with verbs several nouns (sometimes written with a ' ,d somettmes with a small initiall and adjectives; as" ba~ ~onctrt I1!I~b etltt

Ir Ilattfinben)· the concert will take place: ee IDtfb Ibm ~ro, Inetea (or !U); he will bid him defiance' fr lDirb i~n tObtfclllaseu; he wII1 1dJI_ lim d"",ll.